Chevrolet 1994 S10 Pickup Owner`s manual

I I
..
i
p.;
INTRODUCTION
1994 Chevrolet S-10 Blazer Owner's Manual
Welcome
This manual was prepared to acquaint you with the operation and
maintenance of your 1994 Chevrolet S-10 Blazer and to provide important
safety information. There isalso a ChevroletTruck Warranty and Owner
Assistance Informationbooklet. In some vehicles, there can be information
manuals from other manufacturers
like body builders orspecial equipment
companies. We urge you to review all these publicationscarefully. This will
help you enjoy safe and trouble-free operation of your vehicle.
When it comesto service, keep in mind that your Chevrolet dealerknows
your vehicle best and is interested in your complete satisfaction. Your dealer
invites you to return for all of your service needs both during and after the
warranty period.
Remember, if you have a concernand need help handling it to your
satisfaction, see the procedure in the ChevroletTruck Warranty and Owner
Assistance Informationbooklet.
Thanks for choosing a Chevrolet product.
We value you as a member of the
Chevrolet family. We want to assure you of our continuinginterest in your
pleasure and satisfaction with your vehicle.
Chevrolet Motor Division
General Motors Corporation
30007 Van Dyke Ave.
Warren, Michigan
Motor Division
@Copyright1993 General Motors Corporation, Chevrolet
All Rights Reserved
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
1
Important Notes to Owners and Drivers
....About This Manual:
Please keep this manual in your vehicleso it will be there ifyou ever need it
when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, pleaseleave this manual in
it so the new owner can use it.
This manual includes the latest information at the timeit was printed. We
reserve the right to make changes in the productafter that time without
further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
whenever it appears in this manual.
,...About Driving Your Blazer:
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read the
“on-pavement” and “off-road” driving guidelines in this manual. (See
“Driving Guidelines” and “Off-Road Driving With Your Four-wheel Drive
Vehicle” in the Index.)
For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a French Language
Manual:
Aux proprietaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de
ce guide en francais chez votre concessionaire ou au DGN Marketing
Services Ltd., 1500 Bonhill Rd., Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C7.
General Motors, GM and the GM Emblem, Chevrolet and theChevrolet
Emblem, and S-10 are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
..
11
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Two-Door
Four-Door
...
111
Table of Contents
Introduction - How to Use this Manual
This section tells you how to use your manual and includes safety
and vehicle damage warnings and symbols.
Section 1 - Seats and Safety Restraints
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety restraints
properly.
Section 2 - Features & Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
Section 3 - Comfort Controls& Audio Systems
This section tells you howto adjust the ventilation andcomfort
controls and how to operate your audio system.
Section 4 - Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and
how to drive under differentconditions.
Section 5
- Problems on the Road
This section tells you whatto do if you have a problem while
driving, such as a flat tire or engine overheating.
Section 6 - Service & Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running
properly and looking good.
Section 7-
Scheduled Maintenance Services
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and
what fluids and lubricantsto use.
Section 8 - Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact your GM division for
assistance and how to get service publications. It also gives you
information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8-4.
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listingof almost every subject in this
manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
1v
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they
first receive their new vehicle. This will help you learn about thefeatures
and controls foryour vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and
words work together to explain things quickly.
INDEX: A good place to look for what you need is the Index in back of the
manual. It’s an alphabetical list of all that’s in the manual, and the page
number where you’ll find it.
SECTIONS 1-6: Each section of this manual begins with a brief list of its
contents, so you can often find at a glance if a section contains the
information you want.
SECTION 7:This section of the manual covers the maintenance required
for your vehicle.
SECTION 8, CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE:This section includes
important information aboutreporting safety defects and gives you details
about the “Roadside Assistance” program.You will also find customer
satisfaction phone numbers (including customersatisfaction numbers for the
hearing and speech impaired) aswell as the mediatiodarbitration procedure.
We’ve also included orderinginformation for service publicationsin this
section.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box with
gray background and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could
hurt you if you wereto ignore the warning.
In the gray caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you
what to doto help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If
you don’t, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’ “Don’t do this,” or “Don’t let this happen.”
vi
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean thereis something that could damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty,
and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE
warnings in different colors orin different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use yellow for
cautions, blue for notices and the words CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you will find on your vehicle. For example,
these symbols areused on an original battery:
Caution
Possible Injury
Protect Eyes
by Shielding
Caustic BatteryAcid
Could Cause Burns
A void
Sparks
or Flames
. ..
r.*
Spark or Flame Could
Explode Battery
These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your
vehicle is driven:
I
1
Fasfen Safety
Belts
Door LocWUnlock
These symbols have to do with your lights:
A
Master Lighting
Switch
Turn Signal
Direction
Hazard Warning
Flasher
pf
Parking Lights
$0
fog Lights
Daytime
Running Lights
...
v111
Headlight
High Beam
These symbols are on some of your controls:
Windshield
Wiper
Windshield
Washer
Windshield
Defroster
Rear Window
Wiper
0
Defroster
Rear Wlndow
Washer
Off
Window
Ventilating
Fan
Rear
These symbols are usea on warning and indicator lights:
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Brake
(Digital Cluster)
Battery Charging Engine Fuel
System
Brake
(Standard Cluster)
Shift Light
ix
Oil
Pressure
4- Wheel
Anti-Lock
Here are some other symbols you may see:
i
t
- 1
Horn
Fuse
Hood Release
X
Speaker
Seats & Safety Belts
Section
Here you’ll find information aboutthe seats in your vehicle and how to use
your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should
not do with safety belts .
Seats and Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Why Safety Belts Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............................
1-14
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-21
1-22
Right Front PassengerPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-23
LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Children . . ; t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-28
.
Larger Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-40
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Replacing Safety Belts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-41
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats-how to
and down.
adjust them, and fold them up
Front Seats
Manual Front Seat
Move the lever under
the front of the seat
left to unlock it. Slide
the seat to where you
want it. Then release
the lever and try to
move the seat with
your body to make
sure the seat is locked
into place.
1-2
Manual Lumbar Adjustment
..,;:
If you have this
feature, there will be a
knob with six settings
on the outside of the
driver and passenger
bucket seats.
Turn the knob to the
left to increase lumbar
support and to the
right to decrease
lumbar support.
Power Driver's Seat
The left control
makes the rear of the
seat go up and down.
The right control
makes the front of the
seat go up and down.
The center control
makes the whole seat
go up and down or
forward and rearward.
Power Lumbar Adjustment
If you have this
feature, there will be a
control on the front of
your seat. Press and
hold the right side
until you have the
desired lumbar
support. To decrease
lumbar support, press
the left side of the
control.
1 -z
Front Seatback Latches(Two-Door Models)
The front seatback folds forward to letpeople get into the back seat.
To fold a front
seatback forward,
push the seatback
toward the rear as you
lift this latch. Then the
seatback will fold
forward. The latch
must be down for the
seat to work properly.
Reclining Front Seatbacks
(Bucket Seatsor 60/40 Split-Bench)
I
4
1-4
To adjust the seatback,
lift the lever on the
outer side of the seat.
Release the lever to
lock the seatback
where you want it.
Pull up on the lever
and the seat will go to
an upright position.
Don’t have aseatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
1-5
Easy EntrySeat
The right front seat of your vehicle makes it easy to get in and out of the
rear vehicle area.
a When you tilt the right front seatback fully forward, the whole seat will
slide forward.
After someone gets into the rear seat area, move the right front
seatback to its original position. Then move the seat rearward until it
locks.
a To get out, again tilt the seatback fully forward.
Rear Folding Seat (Two-Door Models)
Your utility vehicle has a rear folding seat which lets you fold the seatback
down formore cargo space.
Push back on the
seatback as you pull
forward on the latch at
the righthand side of
the seat cushion. Then
fold the seatback
forward.
To raise it, lift up the seatback and push it untilit locks in the upright
position.
Your rear seatback hasa mechanical latch on the righthand side, and an
inertia latch on the lefthand side. Push and pullon the seatback to be sure that
the right side has locked in the upright position. Have
it fixed if it doesn’t.
Rear Folding Seat (Four-Door Models)
Your utility vehicle has a folding rear seat which lets you fold the seatback
down for more cargo space.
I
The rear seat release
handle is in the upper
center of the rear of
the seatback. Push
back on the seatback
as you pull up on the
handle.
TOraise it, just lift up the seatback and push it until it locks in the upright
position.
1-7
Your rear seatback has mechanical latches on both side. Push and pull on the
seatback to check that both latches have lockedin the upright position. If
they haven’t, have themfixed immediately.
1-8
This figure lights up as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety Belt Reminder
Light” in the Index.)
In many states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts.
Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t
know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes are in between. In
many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away.
Without belts they could have been badly hurtor killed.
After more than 25 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In
most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!
1 -Q
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
For example, if the
bike is going 10 mph
(16 km/h), so is the
child.
When the bike hits the
block, it stops. But the
child keeps going!
Take the simplest
vehicle. Suppose it’s
just a seat on wheels.
1-10
Put someone on it.
-
,
Get it up to speed.
Then stop the vehicle.
The rider doesn't stop.
I
1
The person keeps
going until stopped by
Something.
8al-
or the instrument
panel ...
or the safety belts!
I
With safety belts,you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to
stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces.
That’s why safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
Here Are Questions ManyPeople Ask About
Safety Belts- and fhe Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a
safety belt?
A:
You could be - whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you
can easily unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And
your chance of being conscious duringand after an accident, so you
can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q:
Why don’t theyjust putin air bags so people won’t haveto wear
safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in some vehicles today and will be in more of them in the
future. But they are supplemental systemsonly - so they work with
safety belts, not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for
sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that
has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and
other collisions.
Q: If I’m a good
driver, andI never drivefar from home, why shouldI
wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident - even
one that isn’t your fault - you and your passengers can be hurt. Being
a good driver doesn’tprotect you from thingsbeyond your control,
such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the
greatest number of serious iniuries and deaths occurat speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 k d h ) .
Safety belts are for everyone.
I
I
3
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to “RUN” or “START,” a light will come on for
about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts. Unless the
driver’s safety belt is already buckled,a chime will also sound.
How To Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for peopleof adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and
children. And there are different rules forsmaller children and babies. If a
child will be riding in your vehicle,see the section after this one, called
“Children.” Follow those rulesfor everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systemsyour vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-14
Driver Position
This part describes thedriver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up
straight.
1-15
3. Pick up the latch
plate and pull the
belt across you.
Don’t let it get
twisted.
3
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of
this section.
Make surethe release button on the buckle is positioned so you would
be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lappart of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
1-16
Q: What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection
this way.
1-17
Q: What's wrong with this?
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Q: What’s wrong with this?
1
A:
I
I
I
I
8
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the
shoulder at all times.
1-19
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
I
A:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-20
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the
door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear
safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion
should be worn as low as possible throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt
is worn properly, it’s more likely that thefetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
1-21
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s
safety belt. See “Driver Position,” earlier in this section.
When the lap portion of the belt is pulledout all the way, it will lock. Ifit
does, let it go back all the way and start again.
Center Passenger Position
(Four-Door Models)
1-22
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone can sit in the center
positions.
When you sit in a
center seating
position, you have a
lap safety belt, which
has no retractor. To
make the belt longer,
tilt the latch plate and
pull it along the belt.
To make the belt
shorter, pull its free
end as shown until the
belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a
lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see“Safety Belt Extender”
at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be
able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-23
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics
show that unbelted people in the rear seatare hurt more often in crashes
than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrownout of the vehicle in
a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to
wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Don’t let it get
twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-24
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
On four-door models, when the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of
this section.
Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you would
be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as
you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lappart of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.
1-25
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
To unlatch the belt,
just push the button on
the buckle.
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all
children smaller than adult size. In fact, the law in every state in the United
States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
1-26
Smaller Children and Babies
1-77
Two-Door
Four-Door
. .../
Child Restraints
Be sure to follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints
use the belt systemin your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. The
instructions that come with the infantor child restraint will show you how
to do that.
1-28
Where to Put the Restraint
If you have a 60/40 split bench seat, you must use the right front passenger
seat.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the
rear rather than the front seat. We at General Motors therefore recommend
that you put your child restraint in the rear seat unless the child is an infant
and you’re the only adult in the vehicle. In that case, you might want to
secure the restraint in the front seat where you can keep an eye onthe baby.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child is in it.
Top Strap
If your child restraint
has a top strap, it
should be anchored.
If you need to havean anchor installed, you can ask your Vehicle dealer to
put it in for you. If you want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can
tell you how to do it.
1-29
Securing a Child Restraint ina Rear Outside Position
- Four-Door Models
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap
if the child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child
restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, andrun the lap and shoulder portions of the
vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the restraint.The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it
behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt.
Make sure the
release button is
positioned so you
would be able to
unbuckle the
safety belt
quickly if you
ever had to.
1-30
5 . Pull the rest of
the shoulder belt
all the way out of
the retractor to
set the lock.
6. To tighten the
belt, feed the
shoulder belt into
the retractor
while you push
down on the child
restraint.
7. Push and pull the
child restraint in
different
directions to be
sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let
it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
1-31
Securing a Child Restraint ainRear Outside Position
- Two-Door Models
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the topstrap
if the child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child
restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run thelap and shoulder portions of the
vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.If the shoulder belt goes in front of the
child’s face orneck, put it behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt.
Make sure the
release button is
positioned so you
would be able to
unbuckle the
safety belt
quickly if you
ever had to.
1-32
5. Press the “cinch”
button on the
retractor cover to
set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while
you push down on the child restraint.
7. Push and pull the
child restraint in
different
directions to be
sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let
it goback all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
1-33
Securing a Child Restraint ina Center Rear Seat
Position (Four-Door Models)
Don’t use child restraints in the center position of a 60/40 bench seat.
When ybu Securea child restraint in a center seating position, you’ll be
using the lap belt. But don’t use the rear center seat, unless the base of the
child restraint is small enough to let you reach the buckle and latch plate
easily.
See theearlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1. Make the belt as
long as possible
by tilting the
latch plate and
pulling it along
the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the c‘hillcl
restraint.
3. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say.
4. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
1-34
5. Buckle the belt.
Make sure the
release button is
positioned so you
would be able to
unbuckle the
safety belt
quickly if you
ever had to.
6. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child
restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is
secure. If the child restraint isn’t secure, turn the latch plate over and
buckle it again. Then see if it is secure. If it isn’t, secure the restraint in
a different place in the vehicle and contact thechild restraint maker for
their advice abouthow to attach the child restraint properly.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will
be ready to workfor an adult or larger child passenger.
60/40 Split-Bench Seat
Don’t use a child restraint in this position. The restraint won’t work
properly.
1-35
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap
if the child restraint has one.
1. Put the restraint on the seat. Follow the instructions for the child
restraint.
2. Secure the child in the child restraint as the instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run thelap and shoulder portions of the
vehicle’s safety belt throughor around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
If the shoulder beltgoes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it
behind the child restraint.
4. Buckle the belt.
Make sure the
release button is
positioned so you
would be able to
unbuckle the
safety belt
quickly if you
ever had to.
1-36
5. Pull the rest of
the lap belt all the
way out of the
retractor to set
the lock.
6 . To tighten the
belt, feed the lap
belt back into the
retractor while
you push down
on the child
restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is
secure. If you’re using a bucket seat, adjust the seat forward until the
lap portion of the safety belt holds the restraint firmly. But don’t move
it any more than needed to tighten the lap belt.
1-37
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let
it goback all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
Larger Children
A
Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle’s
safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can
wear a lapshoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide.
0
Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash.
Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are.
1-38
Q: What if a childis wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the childis so
small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child's face or neck
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child's shoulder, so that in a crash the
child's upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close tothe child's
face orneck, you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap
belt, if your vehicle has one.
1-39
I .Thatcould cause serious or fatalinjuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the child's thighs. This applies belt force to
the child's pelvic bones in a crash.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn't long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an
extender. It's free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be
just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that youchoose. Don't let
someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt.
1-40
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors,
anchorages and reminder systems are working properly. Look for any loose
parts or damage. If you see anything that might keep a restraint system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Replacing Safety Belts After
a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the belts were
stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you
need new belts.
If you ever seea label on a right front safety belt that says to replace the
belt, be sure to do so. Then the new belt will be there to help protect you in
an accident. You would see this label on the belt near the door opening.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean
you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New
parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being usedat the
time of the collision.
1-41
Q: What’s wrong with this?
I
A:
The belt is torn.
Torn or frayed belts may not protect you in a crash. They can
rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Before replacing any safety belt,see your dealer for the correct part number.
You’ll need the model year and model number
for your vehicle. The model
year is on your title and registration. And youcan find the model number on
the Certificatioflire label of your vehicle. See “CertificationK‘ire Label” in
the Index.
r
The model number on the replacement belt must
be listed on the safety belt
you want to replace.
Pull shoulder belt allthe way out to see this label.
1-42
Features & Controls
Section
Here you can learn about themany standard and optional features on your
vehicle, and information on starting, shifting, and braking. Also explained
are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything
is working properly- and what to do if you have a problem.
For explanation of vehicle symbols, referto "Vehicle Symbols" in the
Introduction.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Your Doors and How They Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
SideDoors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
DoorLocks ......................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Endgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1
Keys
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Vehicle Break-In
2-14
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
............................................
2-15
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Driving Through Deep Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Five-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . 2-25
Ignitionswitch
ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
3-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
EngineExhaust
Four-WheelDrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Manual Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Electronic Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Tiltwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Windows
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Headlight High-Low Beam
Windshield Wipers
...............................
2-40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2-43
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ..............................
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Windshield Washer
Mirrors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
.
Accessory Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Cigarette LightedAshtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Storage Compartments
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Luggagecarrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-78
Trailer Wiring Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-80
2-2
Keys
The square-shaped
key is for the ignition
only.
The oval-shaped key
is for thedoors and all
other locks.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the plugs from the
keys, and gives them to the first owner.
Each plug has a codeon it that tells your dealer or aqualified locksmith
how to make extra keys. Keep the plugs in a safe place. If you lose your
keys, you'll be able to have new ones made easily using these plugs.
I NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a numberof new features that can help prevent
theft. But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle
if you ever lock your keys inside.You may even haveto damage
your vehicle to get in.So be sure you have extra keys.
2-4
Your Doors And How They Work
Side Doors
To open the door f~*om
the outside, lift the
handle and pull the
door open.
To open the door from
the inside, pull the
lever toward you and
push the door open.
2-5
Door Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle:
From the outside: Use
your door key.
2-6
From the inside: To
lock the door, slide the
lever on your inside
door to LOCK.
To unlock the door,
slide the lever on your
inside door toward
you. You will see a
red area on the lever.
I
Power Door Locks
If your vehicle has
power door locks,
push the power door
lock switch on either
front door toward the
key symbol. This
switch will lock all the
doors at once.
To unlock the doors,
push the switch away
from the key symbol.
On four-door models, the lever on each rear door works only that door’s
lock.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving thevehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the
locks frominside. Then get out and close thedoor.
2-7
Endgate
From the outside, use your door key to unlock theendgate assembly.
~
With the key inthe
lock, turn the lock
handle to the left to
unlock the glass.The
endgate cannot be
opened without first
opening the endgate
glass.
Raise the glass, then
turn the lock handle to
the right to unlock the
endgate. If your
vehicle has a
endgate-mounted
spare tire carrier, you
must move the carrier
arm out of the way to
open the glass.
2-8
Electric EndgafeGlass Release
The electric endgate
glass release lets you
open your endgate
glass by just pressing
a button. The button is
to the left of your
radio.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission,your shift lever must be in
“P” (Park) or“N” (Neutral) forthe release to work.
If you have a manual transmission, either with or without the Keyless Entry
option, you must apply your parking brake before you can open the endgate
glass.
2-9
If your vehicle has a
endgate-mounted
spare tire carrier, you
must move the carrier
arm out of the way to
open the glass.
Endgate-Mounted Spare Tire Carrier
You must move the
carrier arm out of the
way to open the
endgate glass. Here's
how to move the arm:
1. Squeeze the release handle to free the carrier arm.
2. Swing the carrier arm away from the endgate. You may need to give it
a slight tug.
3. To latch the carrier arm, swing it toward the endgate. The latch has two
catches, so push on the carrier arm to make sure it has locked into the
second one. It shouldn't move.
2- 10
Keyless Entry System
If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and unlock your doors or
unlock your trunk from up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the key chain
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Your Keyless Entry System operateson a radio frequency subject
to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules.
This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the followingtwo conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This devicemust accept any interference received,
including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.
Should interference to this systemoccur, try this:
a Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See the
instructions on battery replacement.
a Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. This product
has a maximum range.
a Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the
signal.
a See yourGM dealer or aqualified technician for service.
Changes or modificationsto this system by other than an authorized service
facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
2-11
Operation
When you press UNLOCK, the driver’s door will unlock automatically. If
you press UNLOCK again within five seconds, all doors will unlock. All
doors will lock when DOOR is pressed.
The endgate glass will unlock when the trucksymbol button is pressed.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions must have the transmissionin “P”
(Park). Vehicles with manual transmission must have the parking brake
engaged.
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle
Each key chain transmitteris coded to prevent another transmitter from
unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Rememberto bring any remaining
transmitters with you whenyou go to your dealer. Whenthe dealer matches
the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, the remaining transmitters must
also be matched. Once the new transmitter iscoded, the lost transmitter will
not unlock your vehicle.
You can match a transmitter to as many different vehicles as you own,
provided they are equipped with exactly the same model system. (General
Motors offers several different models of these systems on their vehicles.)
Each vehicle can have only two transmitters matched to it.
See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the batteries in your key chain transmitter should last
about two years.
You can tell the batteries are weak if the transmitter won’t work at the
normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before
the transmitter works, it’s probably timeto change the batteries.
2- 12
Replacing Transmitter Batteries
2. Remove the bottom by twisting the dime.
3. Remove and replace the batteries with two Duracell@-type batteries
(DL2016 or equivalent), positive side down.
4. Align and snap
together the back
and top
transmitter
housings.
2-13
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your
vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can
help.
Key in the Ignition
If you walk awayfrom your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target
for joyriders or professional thieves - so don’t doit.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a tone
reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you.
Always do this. Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your
ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking your key out also
locks your transmission. And remember to lock the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock yourvehicle. Remember
to keep your valuables out of sight. Put themin a storage area, or take them
with you.
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best
to lock it up and take yourkeys. But what if you have to leave your ignition
key? What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?
0
Put your valuables in a storage area, like your glove box.
Lock the glove box.
Lock all the doors exceptthe driver’s.
Then take the door key with you.
2-14
New Vehicle “Break-In’’
NOTICE:
Your modern vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate“break-in.” But
it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these
guidelines:
0
0
Keep your speedat 55 mph (88 km/h) orless for the first500
miles (SO4 km).
Don’t drive at any one speed- fast orslow -for thefirst
500 miles (804 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or
so. During this time your
new brake linings aren’tyet broken
in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this “breaking-in” guideline
every time you getnew brake linings.
L
Ignition Switch
tion key lets you turn
1 . OFF
2. RUN
3. START
4. ACC
5 . LOCK
ACC (Accessory): ACC lets you use things like the radio and the
windshield wipers when the engine is off. To get into ACC, push in the key
and turn it toward you. Your steering wheel will remain locked, justas it
was before you inserted the key.
2- 15
NOTICE:
Prolonged operation of accessories in theACC position could
drain your battery and prevent
you from starting yourvehicle.
LOCK: This position locks your ignition, steering wheel and transmission.
It’s a theft deterrent feature. You will only be able to remove your key when
the ignition is turned toLOCK.
OFF: This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering
wheel. Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while theengine
is off (for example, if your vehicle is being pushed).
RUN: This is the position for driving.
START This starts your engine.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in “LOCK”and you can’t turn it, be
sure itis all theway in. If it is, then turn the steering
wheel left
and right while you turn the key hard. But turn the
key only
with your hand. Using a tool to force itcould break the key or
the ignitionswitch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs
service.
2-16
Key Release Lever
I
The ignition key
cannot be removed
from the ignition of
manual transmission
vehicles unless the
key release lever is
used.
To Remove the Key
Turn the key to the LOCK position while pressing the keyrelease lever
down at the same time. Keeping your finger on the lever, pull the key
straight out.
On automatic transmission vehicles, turn the key to LOCK and pull it
straight out.
Starting Your Engine
Engines start differently. The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) shows the code letter or number for your engine. You will
find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel. (See “Vehicle
Identification Number” in the Index.) Follow the proper steps to start the
engine.
Automatic transmission:
Move your shift lever to “P” (Park) or “N” (Neutral). Your engine won’t
start in any other position - that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re
already moving, use “N” (Neutral) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t tryto shift to “P” (Park) if your vehicleis moving. If you
do, you could damage the transmission.
Shift to “P” (Park) only
when your vehicleis stopped.
Manual transmission:
Hold the clutch pedal to the floor, then shift your gear selector to neutral
while starting the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not
all the way down - that’s a safety feature.
2-17
Tu start your 4.3 Liter engine:
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to “Start.”
When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down
as your engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in “Start” for longer than15 seconds at a time
will cause your battery to be drained much
sooner. And the
excessive heat can damage your starter
motor.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, holdyour key in “Start.” If it doesn’t start
in three seconds, push the accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the
way down for 12 more seconds, or until it starts.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be
flooded with too much gasoline. Try this:
Wait 15 seconds to let the starter motor cool down. Then pushyour
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor. Holdit there. Then, hold the
key in “Start” for no more than ten seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
If the engine still doesn’t start, wait another 15 seconds and do it all
again..
When the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator pedal.
j
~
,
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your
vehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could
change the way the fuel injection system operates. Before adding
electrical equipment, check with your dealer. you
If don’t, your
engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, seethe partof this
manual that tells how to do it without damaging yourvehicle.
See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
2- 18
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles
or standing water,
water can come in through your engine's air intake and badly
or standing
damage your engine.If you can't avoid deep puddles
water, drive through them very slowly.
Engine Coolant Heater (Engine
Block Heater)
(Option)
4.3 Liter:
I . Engine coolant
heater cord cap
2. Engine coolant
heater cord strap
In very cold weather, 0°F (- 18"C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can
help. You'll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine
warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged ina minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To use the coolunt heater:
1. Turn off the engine.
2 . Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1 10-volt outlet.
2-19
NOTICE:
After you’ve used the coolant heater, be sure
to store the cord as
it away from moving engine parts. If you
it was before to keep
don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer
depends on the weather, the kindof oil you have, and some other things.
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact a GM
dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give
you the best advice for that particulararea.
Automatic Transmission
There are several
different positions for
your shift lever.
..
....
P (Park) - This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use
when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.
2-20
1
R (Reverse) - Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to “R” (Reverse) while your vehicle
is moving forward
“R” (Reverse) only
could damage your transmission. Shift to
after your vehicleis stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice orsand
without damaging your transmission, see“If You’re Stuck: In Sand,
Mud, Ice orSnow” in the Index.
N (Neutral) - In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the
wheels. To restart when you’re already moving, use “N” (Neutral) only.
Also, use “ N ’ (Neutral) when your vehicle is being towed.
2-21
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused
by shifting outof “P”
(Park) or “N” (Neutral) with the engine racing isn’t covered
by
your warranty.
@ (Overdrive)
This position is for normal driving. If you need more powerfor
passing, and you’re:
-
Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
-
Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
@ should not be used when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy
load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road driving. Select “D”
(Third Gear) when operating the vehicle under any of these
conditions.
D (Third Gear) - This is like @, but you never go into Overdrive.
You should use “D’ (Third Gear) when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road driving.
2 (Second Gear)- This position gives you more power but lower fuel
economy. You can use “2” (Second Gear) on hills. It can help control
your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would
also want to use your brakesoff and on.
If you manually select “2” (Second Gear), the transmission will drive
in second gear. You may use this feature for reducing torque to therear
wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on
slippery road surfaces.
1 (First Gear)-This position gives you even more power (but lower
fuel economy) than “2” (Second Gear). You can use it on very steep
hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector lever is putin “1” (First
Gear), the transmission won’t shift into “1” (First Gear) until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.
2-22
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might
happen if you were stuck in verydeep sand or mud or were up
against a solid object.You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill,don’t hold your vehicle there
with onlythe accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage
the transmission. Use your brakes or shift into “P” Park to hold
your vehicle in positionon a hill.
Five-Speed Manual Transmission
. . 1
0
This is your shift
pattern. Here’s how to
operate your
transmission:
1 (First Gear)- Press the clutch pedal and shift into “1” (First Gear).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
You can shift into “1” (First Gear) when you’re going less than 20 mph
(32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into
“ I ” (First Gear), put the shift lever in “N” (Neutral) and let up on the
clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into “1” (First
Gear).
0
2 (Second Gear) - Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the
accelerator pedal and shift into “2” (Second Gear). Then, slowly let up
on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
3,4 and 5 (Third, Fourth and Fifth Gears) - Shift into “3” (Third
Gear), “4” (Fourth Gear), and “5” (Fifth Gear) the same way you do for
“2” (Second Gear). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
2-23
a To Stop -Let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,
and shift to “N” (Neutral).
0
N (Neutral)- Use this position when you start or idle your engine.
a
R (Reverse) -To back up, press down the clutch pedal, waitabout 6
seconds, then shift into “R” (Reverse). Then let upon the clutch pedal
slowly while pressingthe accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to “R” (Reverse) only after your vehicle is stopped.
Shifting to“R” (Reverse) while your vehicleis moving could
damage your transmission.
Also, use “ R ’ (Reverse), along with the parking brake, for parking your
vehicle.
Shift Light
If you have a manual
transmission, you
have a SHIFT light.
This light will show
you when to shift to
the next higher gear
for best fuel economy.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next higher gear if weather,
road and traffic conditions let you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate
slowly and shift when the lightcomes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on and off if you
quickly change the position of the accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when
you downshift.
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles Only:If your vehicle has four-wheel drive
and is equipped with a manual transmission, disregard the shift light when
the transfer case is in 4 LOW.
2-24
Locking Rear Axle
If you have this feature, your rear axle can give you additional traction on
snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and theother does, the
locking feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.
-
Parking Brake
To Set the Parking Brake:
Hold the regular brake
pedal down with your
right foot. Push down
the parking brake
pedal with your left
foot. If the ignition is
on, the brake system
warning light will
come on.
To Release the Parking Brake:
Hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the
brake release lever.
I NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes
to
also
overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could
damage other partsof your vehicle.
3-3.5
I
If you are on a hill: See “Parking on Hills” in the Index. That section
shows how to turn your front wheels.
If you are towinga trailer and are parking on any
hill: See “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index. That sectionshows what to do first to keep the trailer
from moving.
Shifting /nto “P” (Park) (Automatic
Transmission Models On/y)
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift
lever into “P”
(Park) position
like this:
Pull the lever toward you.
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
2-26
3. If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear - not in “N” (Neutral).
4. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can walk away from your
vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in “P”
(Park).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running
(Automatic Transmission Models Only)
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transmission into “P”
(Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too muchforce on the
parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of “ P ’ (Park). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock,
set the parking brake and then shift into “P” (Park) properly before you
leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into ‘P’ (Park)” in the
Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of “P” (Park)
BEFORE you release the parking brake.
If “torque lock” does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push
yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of ‘ Y ’ (Park).
3
31
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission
Models Only)
Before you get out of your vehicle, turnoff your engine, put your manual
transmission in “R”(Reverse) and firmly apply the parking brake.
If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfer case shift lever, besure
your transfer case isin a drive gear. Your vehicle could roll if it isn’t.
If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is equipped to tow a trailer,
see “Parking on Hills” or “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Parking Over Things That Burn
2-28
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here
are some things to know.
If you have four-wheel drive with a manual transfercase shift lever and
your transfer case is in “N” (Neutral), your vehicle willbe free to roll, even
if your shift lever is in“P” (Park). So, be sure the transfer case is in adrive
gear - not in “N’ (Neutral). Follow the proper stepsto be sure your vehicle
won’t move. See “Shifting Into ‘P’ (Park)” in theIndex.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in theIndex.
2-30
Four-wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your engine’s driving
power to all four wheels for extra traction.
To shift outof two-wheel drive
and into four-wheel drive, move the transfer case shift lever 4toHIGH or
4 LOW. You should use2 WHEEL for most normal driving conditions,
however.
NOTICE:
Driving in the4 HIGH or4 LOW positions for a long time on
life of your vehicle’s
dry or wet pavement could shorten the
drivetrain.
Manual Transfer Case
If your four-wheel
drive vehicle has the
manual transfer case,
the transfer case shift
lever is on the
floor to
the right of the driver.
Use this leverto shift
into and out of
four-wheel drive.
2-31
An indicator light near
the lever shows you
the transfer case
settings:
0
0
2 WHEEL
4HIGH
N SET PARKING BRAKE
4LOW
The frontaxle portion of the diagram on the indicator will lightup when
you shift into four-wheel drive. A slight delay between shifting and the
pattern's lighting is normal. If the pattern does not light up, or if the front
axle does not go out after you shiftout of four-wheel drive, have your
dealer check your system. Turn the LIGHTS switch located above your
headlight switch to the left to dim your transfer case indicator light when
your headlights or parking lights are on.
2 WHEEL: This setting is for driving in most streetand highway situations.
Your front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive.
4 HIGH: This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle.
Use 4 HIGH when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads,
or in most off-road situations.
N SET PARKING BRAKE: Shift to this neutral setting only when your
vehicle needs to be towed.
4 LOW This setting also engages your front axle to give you extra traction.
You may never need4 LOW. It sends the maximum powerto all four
wheels. You might choose 4 LOW if you were driving off-road in sand,
mud, or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
You can shift from 2 WHEEL to 4 HIGH or from 4 HIGH to 2 WHEEL
while the vehicle is moving. It is not necessary for you to press the transfer
case shift lever button. Your front axle will engage faster if you take your
foot off of the accelerator for a few seconds after you shift.
2-32
To shift your transfer case intoN SET PARKING BRAKE:
1. Stop the vehicle and shift your transmission into “N” (Neutral).
2. Set the parking brake. Your vehicle can roll unless the brakes are
applied.
To shift into or outof 4 LOW :
1. Allow your vehicle to roll at one-to-two mph or stopyour vehicle and
shift your transmission into “N” (Neutral).
2. Press the transfer case shift button and shift in one continuous motion.
Don’t pause inN SET PARKING BRAKE as you shift into or outof 4
LOW, or your gears could clash.
Kemember that driving in 4 HIGH or 4 LOW may reduce fuel economy.
Also, driving in four-wheel drive on dry pavement could cause your tires to
wear faster and make your transfer case harder to shift.
Electronic Transfer Case
If your four-wheel drive vehicle has the electronic transfer case, the transfer
case switch is on the left side of your instrument panel above the light
switches. Use this switch to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. You can
choose among three driving settings:
1 . Two-wheel drive, (2WHEEL): This setting is for driving in most
street and highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive.
2. 4 HI: This setting engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle.
Use 4 HI when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads,
or in most off-road situations.
2-33
3. 4 LO: This setting also engages your front axle to give you extra
traction. You may never need 4 LO. It sends the maximum power to all
four wheels. You might choose 4 LO if you were driving off-road in
sand, mud, deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.
Indicator lights in the switch show you which setting you are in. Both
indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition. If both
lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle in for service. The 4 HI
position has a green indicator light and the 4 LO position has an amber
indicator light. When shifting, an indicator light will flashuntil the shift is
completed then remain solidly lit.
Two-wheel drive, (2 WHEEL), does not have a switch position or an
indicator light. Your vehicle will be in two wheel drive if neither indicator
light is on.
To shift from two-wheel drive,(2 WHEEL) to 4 HI: Press and release the
4 HI switch. This can be done at any speed, and the front axle will lock
automatically.
To shift from 4 HI to two-wheel drive (2 WHEEL): Press and release the
4 HI switch. This can be done at any speed, andthe front axle will unlock
automatically.
To shift from two-wheel drive (2 WHEEL) to 4 LO: The vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) with the transmission in “ N ’
(Neutral) or the clutch pedal depressed.The preferred method for shifting
into 4 LO is to have your vehicle slowly movingone-to-two mph (1.6 to
3.2 k d h ) . Press and release the4 LO switch. You must wait for the amber
4 LO indicator light to stop flashing and go solid amber before shifting your
transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the 4 LO switch is pressed when your vehicleis in gear and/or moving,
the amber 4 LO indicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete
the shift unless your vehicle is below3 mph (4.8 k d h ) and the transmission
is in “N” (Neutral) or the clutch pedal depressed.
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles: If your transfer case doesnot
shift into 4 LO, your transmission indicator switch may requireadjustment.
With your transmission in “N” (Neutral), press and release the 4 LO
switch. While the amber 4 LO indicator light is flashing, shift your
transmission into P (Park).
2-34
Wait until the 4 LO indicator light goes solid amber before shifting your
transmission into gear. This will get you into 4 LO, but you should take
your vehicle in for service so normal operation canbe restored.
To shift from 4 LO to 4 HI: Your vehicle must be stopped or moving less
than 3 mph (4.8 k d h ) with the transmission in “N” (Neutral) and the clutch
pedal depressed. The preferredmethod for shifting out of 4 LO is to have
your vehicle slowly moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 kmh). Press and release
the 4 HI switch. You must wait for the4 HI indicator light to stop flashing
and go solid amber beforeshifting your transmission into gear or releasing
the clutch pedal.
If the 4 HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving,
the 4 HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but not complete the shift
unless the vehicle is below 3 mph (4.8 k d h ) and the transmission is in “N”
(Neutral) or the clutch
pedal depressed.
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles: If your transfer case does not
shift into 4 HI, your transmission indicator switch may require adjustment.
With your transmission in “N” (Neutral), press and release the 4 HI switch.
While the 4 HI indicator light is flashing, shift your transmission into P
(Park). Wait until the 4 HI indicator light goes solid green before shifting
your transmission into gear. This will get you into 4 HI, but you should
take your vehicle in for service so normal operation can be restored.
To shift from4 LO to two-wheel drive (2 WHEEL): You must shift from
4 LO to 4 HI before shifting back into two-wheel drive.
Windows
To open your manual
windows, turn the
hand crank on each
1
door to raise or lower
your side door
windows.
If you have the
optional power
windows, the controls
are on each of the side
doors.
The driver’s doorhas a switch for the passenger windows as well.Your
power windows will only work when the ignition has been turnedto RUN.
Push the switch downto lower the window.
Push the switch up to raise the window.
Sliding Rear Quarter Window (Two-Door Only)
Your vehicle may
have a sliding rear
quarter window. Pull
the latch inthe center
of the window and
slide the glass to open
it. When you close the
window, be sure the
latch catches.
F
4
2-36
Horn
Press the pad in the
center of the steering
wheel to sound the
horn.
Tilt Wheel(Option)
A tilt steering wheel
allows you to adjust
the steering wheel
before you drive.
You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when
you enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheeland pull the lever. Move the
steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release thelever to lock the
wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
2-37
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your:
0
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
Headlight High-Low Beam
Windshield Wipers
WindshieldWasher
0
Cruise Control (Option)
0
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
The turn sign211 has
two upward (for
Right) and two
downward (for Left)
positions. These
positions allow you to
signal a turn or a lane
change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the turn is
finished, the lever will return automatically.
2-38
Standard Cluster
Digital Cluster
A green arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn
or lane change.
To signal a lane change, justraise or lower the lever until the green arrow
starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever
will return by itself when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows don’t flash butjust stay
on, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn
signal.
If your vehicle has the digital instrument cluster, the turn signal arrows will
flash at a faster rate if a signal bulb is burnedout.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the green
arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses”
in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for thetrailer lights, a
different turn signal flasher is used. With thisflasher installed, the signal
indicator will flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the front
and rear turn signal lights regularly to make sure they are working.
2-39
Operation of Lights
Although your vehicle's lighting system (headlights, parking lights,fog
lamps, side marker lights and taillights) meets all applicable federal lighting
requirements, certain states and provinces may apply their own lighting
regulations that may require specialattention before you operate these
lights.
For example, some jurisdictions may require that you operate your fog
lamps only when your lower beam headlights are also on, or that headlights
be turned on whenever you must use your windshield wipers. In addition,
most jurisdictions prohibit driving solely with parking lights, especiallyat
dawn or dusk. It is recommended thatyou check with your own state or
provincial highway authority for applicable lighting regulations.
Headlight High-Low Beam
To change the
headlights from low
beam to high or high
to low, pull the turn
signal lever all the
way toward you. Then
release it.
When the high beams
are on, this blue
indicator light on the
instrument panel also
will be on.
2-40
Windshield Wipers
You control the
windshield wipers by
turning the band with
the wiper symbol on
it.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold it there until the
wipers start, then let go.The wipers will stop after one cycle.If you want
more cycles, hold the bandon MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed fora long or short delay between wipes.This can
be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time.
The closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping atlow speed, turn the band away fromyou to the LO
position. For high speed wiping, turnthe band further, to HI. To stop the
wipers, move the band to the off symbol.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may preventyou from seeing well
enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sureto clear ice and snow from
the wiper blades before using them.If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, getnew
blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit breaker will stop
them until the motor cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
2-41
Windshield Washer
At the top of the multifunction lever there’s a paddle marked with
the
windshield washer symbol and PUSH. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle.
The wipers will clear the window and theneither stop or return to your
preset speed.
Driving without washer fluid can be dangerous. A bad mud splash can block
your vision. You could hit another vehicle or go off the road. Checkyour
washer fluid level often.
2-42
NOTICE:
0
When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can
cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid
of the washersystem. Also, water
tank and other parts
doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tankonly 3/4 full when it’s very cold,
This allows for expansion, which could damage the iftank
it is
completely full,
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshieldwasher. It
can damage your washer system and paint.
Rear Window Wipermasher
I
To turn on the wiper, press the part of the switch with the washer
symbol on it to the first position.
To wash the window, press the part of the switch with the wasner
symbol on it in all the way. The wipers will continue to work after you
release the switch.
Press “OFF” to turn the wiper off.
The rear window washer uses thesame fluid bottle as the windshield
washer. However, the rear window washer will runout of fluid before the
windshield washer. If you can wash your windshield butnot your rear
window, check your fluid level.
2-43
Cruise Control (Option)
With Cruise Control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 k d h )
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help
on long trips. Cruise Control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph
(40 k d h ) .
If you have a manual transmission and you apply your brakesor push the
clutch pedal, the Cruise Control will shut off.
2-44
To Set CruiseControl
E
Move the Cruise
Control switch to
ON.
0
Get up to the speed you want.
Push in the set button at the end of the lever and release it.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
2-45
To Resume a Set Speed
Suppose you set your Cruise Control at a desired speed and then you apply
the brake. This, of course, shuts off the Cruise Control. But you don’t need
to reset it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 k d h ) or more, you can
move the Cruise Control switch from ON to R/A (Resume/Accelerate) for
about half a second.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there.
Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A (Resume/Accelerate) longer than
half a second, the vehicle willkeep going faster until you releasethe switch
or apply the brake. You could be startled and evenlose control. So unless
you want to go faster, don’t hold the switchat R/A (Resume/Accelerate).
To Increase Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are twoways to go to a higher speed. Here’s the first:
0
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Push the buttonat
the end of the lever, then releasethe button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higherspeed.
!
2-46
Here’s the second :
0
Move the Cruise switch from ON to WA (R&sur%e/Accelerate).Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the
switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to WA
(Resume/Accelerate). Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph ( I .6 km/h) faster.
To Reduce Speed While Using Cruise Control
Push in the
button at the end
of the lever until
you reach the
lower speed you
want, then release
it.
To slow down in very small amounts, push the button for less than half
a second. Each time you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 k r d h ) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed, When you take your foot
off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the Cruise Control speed you
set earlier.
2-47
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well yourCruise Control will workon hills depends upon your speed,
load, and the steepness of the hills. When going upsteep hills, you may
want to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed
down. Of course, applying the brake takes youout of Cruise Control. Many
drivers find this to betoo much trouble and don’tuse Cruise Control on
steep hills.
To Get Out of Cruise Control
. .
. .. ... ,
Move the Cruise
switch to OFF.
2-48
To Erase Speed Memory
When you turn off the Cruise Control or the ignition, your Cruise Control
set speed memory is erased.
Lights
Your light switches
are on the left side of
your instrument panel.
Push the top switch to turn on:
0
Parking Lights
0
Sidemarker Lights
0
Taillights
License Plate Lights
Instrument Panel Lights
Transfer Case Shift Indicator Panel
Push the bottom switch to turn on the headlights, together with:
Parking Lights
Sidemarker Lights
0
Taillights
License Plate Lights
Instrument Panel Lights
Transfer Case Shift Indicator Panel
Push the switch marked OFF to turn off your lights.
Turn the switch above the headlight switch up to make your instrument
panel and transfer case lights brighter. Turn the switch all the way to the
right until it clicks to turn on the interior lights.
2-49
Turn the switch to the left t o dim your instrument panel and transfercase
indicator lights.
You can switch your headlights from high to low beamby pulling on the
multifunction lever.
A circuit breaker protects your headlights. If you have an electrical
overload, your headlights will flicker on and off. Have your headlight
wiring checked right away if this happens.
Fog Lamps (Option)
The fog lamp switch is on the instrument panel under the headlightswitch.
Press the right side of
the switch to turn the
fog lamps on, and the
left side of the switch
to turn them off. A
light will glow in the
right side of the
switch when they are
on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much light as your
headlights.
Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turning on your headlights.
Fog lamps will go off whenever your high beam headlightscome on. When
the high beams go off, the fog lamps will come on again.
2-50
Daytime Running Lights(DRL) Indicator Light
(Canada Only)
If your vehicle was first sold, when new, in Canada, you will have this light
on the instrument panel. It goes on whenever the Daytime Running Lights
are on, the ignition is on, the headlamp switch is off, and the parking brake
is released.
Daytime Running Lights (CanadaOnly)
The Canadian Federal Government has decided that “Daytime Running
Lights” (DRL) is a useful feature, in that DRL can make your vehicle more
visible to pedestrians and other drivers during daylight hours. DRL is
required on new vehicles sold in Canada.
The high beam headlights will come on at reduced brightness in daylight
when:
The ignition is on,
The headlight switch is off, and
0
The parking brake is released.
When you turn on your headlights, the DRL will switch off and theexterior
lights will come on. When you turn off the headlights, the exterior lights
will go out and the high beams will change to the reduced brightness of
DRL again.
The DRL indicator light on the instrument panel will go on whenever the
DRL is on. This light means that only the DRL is on. When you turn on
your exterior lights, this light will go out.
7.-51
If the DRL indicator light is on at dawn or dusk, it is a reminder to turn on
your headlights.
Of course, you may still turn on the headlights any timeyou need to.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake.The DRL will
stay off until you releasethe parking brake.
Headlights-On Reminder
A reminder tone will sound when your headlightsor parking lights are
turned on and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACC. To turn the tone off,
turn the dimmer switch all the wayto the left.
Dome Lights
The domelights will
come on when you
open the sidedoors.
You can also turnthe
dome light on by
turning the dimmer
switch to the right
until it clicks.
I
The rear dome light
has a switch thatlets
you turn it on from the
rear of the vehicle. Be
sure you turn it off
when you are finished.
2-52
Overhead Console Reading Lights
If you have the
overhead console, you
can turn your reading
lights on and off by
pressing in on the
button by each light.
The lights can also be
swiveled to point in
the direction you
want.
Mirrors
Inside Mirror
Press the tab under the
mirror to reduce glare
from headlights
behind you.
r
If your vehicle has the optional lighted mirror, thelights will automatically
come on for approximately 15 seconds when either front door is opened, or
until the ignition is turned to RUN or ACC.
2-53
You can also turnthe
mirror lights on and
off by pressing the
switch near each light.
However, the ignition
must be turned to
RUN or ACC for the
lights to come on.
Outside Mirrors
..,,.., ..
Adjust your outside
mirrors so you can
just see the side of
your vehicle.
L J
Some mirrors are manually adjustable, andsome mirrors come with an
optional remote control adjustment switch. Find the switch onthe lower
righthand side of the instrument panel.
Move the switch to
the right or left to
choose the mirror,
then move theswitch
from side to side or up
and down as needed.
2-54
If you have the manually adjustable mirror, you canfold itbefore entering a
carwash. To fold, pull the mirrors in towards the vehicle. Push the mirrors
back out when finished.
Convex Outside Mirror
Your right side mirror is convex.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can seemore from the driver’s
seat.
Sun VisorsNanity Mirrors
To block out glare,
you can swing down
the visors. You can
also swing them from
side to side. Your
visors have an
extension that can be
pulled out for
additional glare
protection and a strap
for holding small
items, such as maps.
2-55
Some visors have a
"dual visor" feature
where you can swing
portions of the visor in
different directions at
the same time to block
out glare.
Some visors have
mirrors built in, with
and without lights.
Just lift the mirror
cover on each visor to
turn the lightson if
you have them.
Accessory Power Outlet (Option)
I If you have the
accessory power
outlet, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical
equipment. Just
unsnap the top of the
cap and follow the
proper installation
instructions that are
included with any
electrical equipment
you install.
These circuits are protected by fuses and have maximum current levels.
2-56
NOTICE:
When using the accessory power outlet, maximum electrical load
should not exceed8 amps. Always turn off any electrical
equipment when not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods can drain your battery.
Cigarette Lighter/Ashtrays
To use the lighter,
press it in all the way,
and let go. When it’s
ready, it will pop back
by itself.
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your handwhile it is heating. If you
do, it won’t be able to back away from the heating element when it’s ready.
That can make it overload, damaging the lighter and the heating element.
r
To remove the front
ashtray, pull on the
front of it and push
down at the same
time.
To remove the smaller ashtrays on both sides of the back seat, press down
on the tabs inside and pull.
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtray. If you do,
cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire causing
damage.
2-57
Storage Compartments
Your vehicle may
have a console
compartment between
the bucket seats. To
open it, just lift the top
of the console while
pressing the buttonon
the driver’s side.
If you have an automatic transmission, yourconsole includes a handy place
to hold beverage cups. If you have a manual transmission, yourconsole will
have a tray.
You may also have
storage pockets onthe
back of your power
bucket seats or 60140
split-bench seats.
To open your glove
box, squeeze the
buttons on either side
of the keyhole
together and pullthe
door open.
2-58
I
The inside of the door
also includes cup
holders. Use your
door key to lock your
glove box.
A narrow shelf under
your instrument panel
may be used for items
such as gloves or
small books.
You will find a storage
pocket on each of the
front doors. The
driver's doorpocket
contains acoin holder
for your loose change.
2-59
Some two-door
vehicles have zippered
storage bags on either
side of the back seat.
Ad
F
2-60
It has storage
compartments inside it
which can be used to
conveniently store
small items, like your
sunglasses.
Garage Door Opener Compartment
If you have a garage door opener, the front overhead compartment can be
used to conveniently store the opener.
V
d
6"
ys
I
To install the garage
door opener, first open
the compartment door
the latch
by
- pressing
Peel the protective
backing from the hook
and loop patch. Press
it firmly to the back of
your garage door
opener, as close to the
center of the opener as
Dossible.
Center the garage door
opener activation
button over the
console door button
and press the opener
firmly into place.
2-61
The pegs inside the
compartment door are
used to make sure the
button on the
compartment door
will contact the
control button on the
garage door opener.
Add one peg at a time
until the garage door
opener operates with
the compartment door
closed when you press
the button.
P
Now, with the
compartment door
closed, push the
button again to make
sure the garage door
opener operates
properly.
F;
With the garage door opener positioned properly and the right numberof
pegs in place, you should only have to push the button slightly to operate
the opener. Adjust the positionof the garage door opener and add or remove
pegs, as needed, until the opener operates properly.
2-62
Convenience Net
A convenience net
may be providedfor
the rear of your
vehicle to help keep
small items, like
gloves and light
clothing in place
during sharp turns or
quick stops and starts.
The net is not designedto retain these items during off-road use. The net is
not for larger, heavier items.
Install the convenience net at the rear of the vehicle, just inside the endgate.
Attach the upper loops to the retainers on either side of the endgate opening
(the label should be in the upperpassenger side corner, visible from the rear
of vehicle). Attach the lower loops to the retainers near the loadfloor of the
endgate opening.
Security Shade
If you have the
optional cargo
security shade, you
can use it to cover
items in the cargo area
of your vehicle.
Grasp the handle and
pull the shade to
unroll it. Latch the
posts into the sockets
on the inside trim
panel to secure it.
2-63
instrument Panel
I
l2 l1 l3l5
lo
I . Side Window Defogger Vent
2. Rear Wiperwasher Switch
3. Instrument Cluster
4. Air ConditionerRIeater
5. Vents and A/C Outlet
6. Glove Box
7. Audio System
8. Rear Window Release Switch
9. Cigarette Lighter
10. Lap Cooler Vent
11. Hood Release Handle
12. Brake Release Handle
2-64
13. Light Switches
14. Rear Window Defogger Switch*
15. Fog Light Switch** or Rear Window Defogger Switch with Electronic
Transfer Case
16. Remote Outside Mirror Switch
*Without Electronic Transfer Case
“*Without Four-wheel Drive
Instrument Cluster
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your
vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much
fuel you’ve used, and many other things you’ll need to know todrive safely
and economically.
If you have the digital cluster it looks different but will tell you everything
the standard cluster does. The digital cluster also includes a tachometer and
will give readings in either English or Metric. To switch from English to
Metric, just press down on the E/M button.
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets
you see your speed in
both miles per hour
(mph) and kilometers
per hour ( k d h ) .
#3
Y
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles
(used in the U.S.) or kilometers (used in Canada).
2-65
Tamper Resistant Odometer
Standard Cluster
Digital Cluster
I
dl
I
___l
Your odometer is tamper resistant. It will show silver lines between the
numbers if someone tries to turn it back.
The digital odometer will read ERROR if someone tries to turn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer
installed. If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer,
then it must be. But if it can't, then it's set at zero, and a label must be put
on the driver's door to show the old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
Standard Cluster
Digital Cluster
2-66
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since
you last set the trip odometer to zero. Make sure the button is completely
depressed to reset the trip odometer.
To set the trip odometer on the standard cluster to zero, fully depress the
button near the readout.
The trip odometer on the digital cluster will appear in place of your regular
odometer when you press down on the Trip button. To reset the trip
odometer on the digital cluster, press down on the Reset button. To change
back to the regular odometer, press down on the Trip button again.
Tachometer
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm). It is
available only with the
digital speedometer.
NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area,
or engine damage may occur.
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This section describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your
vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it
becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement.
Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights go on when there may be or is a problem with one of your
vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages,
some warning lights come on briefly when you turn the ignition key just to
let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you
should not be alarmed when this happens.
7-67
Gages can indicate when there may be oris a problem with one of your
vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work togetherto let you
know when there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are
driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the
section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow the manual’sadvice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly - and even dangerous. So please get to
know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Brake System Warning Light
Digital Cluster
Standard Cluster
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts.If one part
isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you.For good braking,
though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could bea brake problem. Have your
brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on as you start the vehicle. Ifit doesn’t come on
then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop
carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push.Or, the pedal may
go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have
the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle’’ in the Index.)
2-68
The brake system warning light will also come on when you set your
parking brake, and it will stay on if your parkingbrake doesn’t release fully.
If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a
brake problem.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
Digital Cluster
Cluster
Standard
ANTI LOCK
With anti-lock, this light will go on when you start your engine and may
stay on for several seconds. That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, your vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have
brakes, but youdon’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a
problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake System Warning Light’’
earlier in this part.
2-69
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Standard Cluster
Digital Cluster
If you have a standard cluster, thisgage shows the engine coolant
temperature. If the gage pointer movesinto the red area, yourengine is too
hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.If you have been
operating your vehicle under normal drivingconditions, you should pull off
the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
If you have a digital cluster, a box around the temperature symbol willalso
flash and a chime will sound when yourengine is too hot.
Hot Coolant Can Burn you Badly!In Problems On The Road, this manual
explains what to do. See“Engine Overheating ” in the Index.
2-70
Malfunction Indicator Light
(SERVICE ENGINE SOON)
Standard Cluster
A computer monitors operation of your fuel, ignition and emission control
systems. This light should come on when the ignitionis on, but the engine is
not running, as a check to show you it is working. If it does not come on at
all, have it fixed right away. If it stays on, or it comes on while youare
driving, the computer is indicating that you have a problem. You should
take your vehicle in for service soon.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while
the emission controls won’t work as well, your fuel economy
as smoothly. This
won’t be as good and your engine may not run
could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
2-71
Oil Pressure Gage
Standard Cluster
Digital Cluster
f
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per
square inch) when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure in kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with engine speed,
outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the low pressure
zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be causedby a dangerously low oil
level or otherproblems causing low oil pressure.
On the digital cluster, a box around the oil pressure symbolwill begin to
flash when the oil pressure is low.
Don't keep drivingif the oil pressure is low. If you do, your
engine can become so hot thatit catches fire. You or otherscould
be: burned, Check your oilas soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglectedoil problems can be
costly and is not coveredby your warranty.
2-72
Indicator Lights
Indicator lights go on when you use your turn signals, change from low
beam headlights to high beams, or when you use your hazard flashers. The
next few pages will also tell you about the indicator lights on your vehicle
and help you locate them.
Charging System Light
The charging system
light is on your
instrument cluster and
will come on briefly
when you turn on the
ignition, but the
engine is not running,
as a check to show
you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on, or comes on while
you are driving, you may have a problem with the charging system. It could
indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on
could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all
your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
If you have the
standard cluster, this
Check Gages light
will come on briefly
when you are starting
the engine. If the light
comes on and stays on
while you are driving,
check your various
gages to see if they are
in the warning zones.
2-73
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Indicator Light
(Canada OnIy)
This green DRL
indicator light is on
the instrument cluster.
The DRL indicator
light is on whenever
the ignition ison and
the headlight switch
and parkingbrake.are
off. For more details
about DRL, see
“Lights” in this
section.
SHIFT Indicator Light
This amber SHIFT
indicator light is on
the instrument cluster
of vehicles with
manual transmissions.
The SHIFT indicator
light will help you get
the best fuel economy.
See “Shift Indicator
Light” in this section.
2-74
Headlight High Beam lndicator Light
This blue high beam
indicator light is on
the instrument cluster
and is on whenever
you use your high
beam headlights. For
more details about
high beams, see
“Headlight High-Low
Beam Changer” in this
section.
Turn Signal and Lane Change lndicator
Standard Cluster
Digital Cluster
4
This light with the green arrows is on the instrument cluster. The turn signal
indicator will come on whenever you signal a turn or lane change. See
“Turn and Lane Change Signal” in this section.
2-75
Gages
Fuel Gage
Digital Cluster
Standard Cluster
The fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have remaining when the
ignition is on. When the gage first indicates empty, you still have a little fuel
left, but you should get more fuel soon.
A box around the gage symbol on the digital cluster will begin to flash when
your tank is 1/8 full or less.
Here are fourthings that some owners ask about. None of these show a
problem with your fuel gage:
0
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. For
example, the gage may have indicated the tank was halffull, but it
actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the
tank.
The gagemoves a little when you turn a corner or speed up.
The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn off the ignition.
For your fuel tank capacity, see the Index under “Fluid Capacities.”
2-76
Voltmeter
Standard Cluster
Digital Cluster
I
When your engine is not running, but the ignition is on (in the RUN
position), this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in DC volts, When
the engine is running, the gage shows the condition of the charging system.
Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
On the digital cluster, a box around the voltmeter symbol will begin to flash
when the charging system needs service.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone.
If you must drive, turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical
system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
2-77
Luggage Carrier (Option)
carrier.
Use GM accessory racks thatare compatible with yourluggage carrier for
transporting sports equipment. These are available through yourGM dealer.
Remove the center
rubber strips in the
cross rails and attach
the GM accessory
rack to the tap plates
provided through the
center slots (four per
cross rail).
The tap plates can be moved to accommodate various positioning by sliding
them inside the cross railto the desired locations before mountingthe rack.
You can adjust the cross railsto handle different size loads. Just loosen the
slider screws at each end of the cross rail and movethem where you want
them. Make sure both sides of the cross rail are even, then tighten the slider
screws.
2-78
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
Carrying small, heavy loads on the roof is not recommended.
Tie the load to the moveable tie down, (two per each side of the
siderails). Use the cross rails only to keep the load fromsliding,
If you need to carry long items, move the cross rails as far apart as
possible. tie the load to the moveable tie downs provided in the side
rails. Also tie the load to thebumpers. Do not tie the load so tightly that
the cross rails or siderails are damaged.
~
~~
NOTICE:
Loading cargo thatweighs more than200 pounds (91 kg) on the
luggage carrier may damage your
vehicle. when you carry large
things, never let them hang over the
rear or thesides of your
vehicle. Load your cargoso that it rests on the slats and does not
scratch or damage the
vehicle.
Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it securely to th
as you can.
luggage carrier. Put the main weight as far forward
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle. For
more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving, check now and then to
make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.
2-79
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle may haveeither a 5-wire or 7-wire harness.
The light duty trailer wiring isa 5-wire harness assembly taped and bundled
at the left corner of the vehicle interior, next to the endgate. The harness has
no connector, and you should have a qualified service person wire your
harness for you. It must be routed outof your vehicle and attachedso that
the trailer or the body won’t pull it.
The heavy duty trailer wiring isa 7-wire harness assembly consisting of a
5-wire harness and a 2-wire harness taped together and stored under the
vehicle, along the rear frame crossmember. It has a 30-amp feed wire with
an inline fuse located by the junction block. See “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index.
Both the 5-wire harness and the 2-wire harness have no connector and
should be wired by a qualified service person. Attach the harnessto the
trailer, then tape or strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you leave it
loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bendor break, but not so loose that it
drags on the ground.
Store the harness in its original place. Wrap the harness together and tie it
neatly so it won’t be damaged.
2-80
Comrort Controls & Audio Systems
Section
In this part you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control systems and
audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be sure to read about the particular
system supplied with your vehicle .
For explanation of vehiclesymbols, refer to “Vehicle Symbols” in the
Introduction
.
Comfort Controls
3-2
Flow-Through Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Heater/Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
3-5
Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audiosystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
FMStereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
.
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
AMStereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-8
How to Operate Your ETR@AM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Operate Your ETR@AM-FM Stereo Audio System . . . . . 3-10
How to Operate Your ETR@AM-FM Stereo Audio Cassette
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
How to Operate Your ETR’ AM-FM Stereo Audio Cassette System
With Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18
How to Operate Your ETR’ AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc
(CD)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Care of Your Compact Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
*
3-1
*
t
!
%
*
B
B
Comfort Controls
Flow-Through Ventilation System
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies outside air to the
inside of your vehicle when it is moving. With the side windows closed, air
will flow intothe front air inlet grilles, through the vehicle, and out the rear
air exhaust valve. Outside air will also enter the vehicle when theheater or
the air conditioning fan is running.
Ventilation Tips
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow, or any other
obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will work far
better, reducing thechance of fogging the inside of your windows.
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the blower fan to HI for
a few moments before driving off. This helps clear the intake ducts of
snow and moisture, and reduces thechance of fogging the inside of
your windows.
Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air to
circulate throughout your vehicle.
3-2
Air Vents
You will find air vents in the center and on the sides of your instrument
panel. You can move the vents to direct the flow of air, or close the vents
altogether. When you close a vent, it will increase the flow of air coming out
of any vents that are open.
If your vehicle does not have air conditioning, there are air vents in each
kick panel below the instrument panel. Each vent has a handle to open and
close it.
Heater Controls
If your vehicle does
not have air
conditioning, your
heater controls will
look like this.
Fan Lever:
The lever at the topof the system has four positions. To increase the air
flow, move the lever toward HI. To decrease the air flow, move it toward
OFF.
3-3
Temperature Lever:
The lever on the left of the system lets you select the temperature of the air
flowing into your vehicle. Move the lever up for warmer air. Movethe lever
down for coolerair.
Mode Function Lever:
The leveron the right of the system can be moved to three different heating
functions.
DEFROST: This setting operates the defroster. Most of the air comes out
near the windshield, with some going to the floor vents and side window
defrost vents. Use this when you getfog or ice on the windshield.
HTR (Heater): Most of the air comes out near the floor. The rest comes out
from the defroster vents under thewindshield and at the front side windows.
This is best for cold weather.
VENT: The air comes out at the vents on your instrument panel and at your
front side windows.
Heating/Air Conditioning Controls
If your vehicle has air
conditioning, your
heating/air
conditioning controls
will look like this.
Before using your vehicle’s air conditioning, open the windows to clear me
vehicle of hot air.
Fan Lever:
The lever at the top has four positions. To increase the air flow, move the
lever toward HI. To decrease theair flow, moveit toward LO.
Temperature Lever:
The lever on the left of the system display lets you select the temperature of
the air flowing into your vehicle. Move the lever up for warmer air. Move
the lever down for cooler air.
Mode Function Lever:
The lever on the right of the system can be moved to seven different heating
and air conditioning functions.
3-4
DEFROST This setting operates the defroster. Most of the air comes out
near the windshield, with some goingto the floor vents and side window
defrost vents. Use this when you get fog or ice on the windshield.
HTR (Heater): Most of the air comes out near the floor. The rest comes out
from thedefroster vents under the windshield and at your front side
windows. This is best for cold weather.
VENT The air comesout at the vents on your instrument panel and at your
front side windows.
BI-LEV A/C: With this, outside air comes in through the heater floor vent
and the instrumentpanel vents. This setting is useful in cool weather with
bright sunlight.
NORM A/C: This setting cools the outsideair. If you first use MAX, use
NORM as soon as the vehicle has cooled down, so outside air will be going
through your vehicle.
MAX A/C: This cools theair the fastest. Move the otherlever all the way to
Cold. MAX lets in only a little air from the outside. You can use MAX at
first when it’s really hot outside and you need to cool off quickly.
NOTICE:
If vehicle is parked with function lever in MAX A/C position
and on an incline with the right side lower than the left, then
water may leak into the passenger compartment in an unusually
heavy rain.
J
OFF: The blower is off, but air still will come from outlets at the front of
your vehicle. The system will try to keep the air at the chosen temperature.
Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heate
If you use the optional engine coolantheater before starting your engine,
your heating system will produce warmer air faster, to heat the passenger
compartment in cold weather. See “EngineCoolant Heater” in the Index.
Rear Window Defogger
If your vehicle has this option the rear window will have lines running
across theglass. These lines heat your window.
For best results, clear the window of as much snow or iceas possible first.
3-5
To turn on the rear
window defogger, find
the switch marked
REAR DEFOGon
your instrument panel.
Press “ON” until the
light in the switch
comes on, then release
it. The rear window
defogger will only
work if the ignition
switch is turnedto
RUN.
You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing “OFF.”The defogger
will shut itself off after several minutes so that the glass does not get too
hot. If the window still isn’t clear, turn the defogger on again.
NOTICE:
Scraping the insideof your rear window could cut and damage
the defogger. Your warranty would not coverthis damage. Don’t
put decals there, either.You might have to scrape themoff.
Audio Systems
Your Delco@audio system has been designedto operate easily and give
years of listening pleasure. Butyou will get the most enjoyment out of it, if
you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out whatyour Delco@system canI
do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most oIU t
of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Be aware that hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until
it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that
seems normal can be loudand harmful to your hearing. Take precautionsby
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your
hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing lossor damage:
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly.
3-6
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound. But FM signals will reach only
about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with
FM signals, causing thesound to come and go.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night.
The longer range,however, can cause stations to interfere with each other.
AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing
the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
AM Stereo
This means the Delco@system can receive C-QUAM@ stereo broadcasts.
Many AM stations around the country use C-QUAM@ to produce stereo,
though some do not. (C-QUAM’ is a registered trademark of Motorola,
Inc.) If your Delco@ systemcan get C-QUAM@, your “STEREO” light will
come on when you’re receiving it.
NOTICE:
1
Before youadd any sound equipment to your vehicle - like a
tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two-way radio - be
sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s very important
to do itproperly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delco@radio or other
systems, and even damage them. And, your vehicle’s systems
may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has
been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check withyour dealer and
be sure tocheck Federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units.
3-7
How to Operate Your ETW AM Radio
This part tells you how your ETR@AM radio works.
The Upper Knob
The upper knob does these three things:
It controls the volume. The VOL knob increases volume when rotated
to the right.
It lets you see what station you have. (When the radio is on, push the
knob to display the station.)
It tells you the time. (When the ignition is off, push the RECALL knob
to display the time.)
BAL (Balance)
The BAL control behind the upper knob moves the sound between the left
and right speakers.
The Lower Knob
Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations.
Tone Levers
Two levers control the tone of your radio.
BASS --Slide this lever up to increase the bass response.
TREBLE -Slide this lever up to increase the treble response.
Adjust this lever to give a pleasing sound. If a station is weak and noisy,
move TREBLE down to reduce the noise.
3-8
PWR (Power)
The PWR button turns your system on and off.
Pushbuttons
The four pushbuttonslet you return to favorite stations. To set the
pushbuttons, just:
0
Tune in the station.
Push SET. (SET appears in the VF display for a few seconds.)
0
Within 5 seconds, push one of the four pushbuttons. Whenever you
push that button, the preset station will return.
NOTE:
Up to three additional stations may be preset by pressing two adjoining
buttons at the sametime.
Tune in the station.
0
Push SET. (SET appears in the VF display for a few seconds.)
Within 5 seconds, push any two adjoining buttons at the same time.
(The station will return when the same two buttons are pressed again.)
Clock
To set the clock, just:
Push SET.
0
Within 5 seconds, push and hold HRS (time will be displayed) until the
correct hour appears.
0
Push and hold MINS until the correct minute appears.
To display the clock with the ignition off, push the upper knob. The time
will be displayed for afew seconds.
3-9
How to Operate Your
ETW AM-FM Siereo Audio Sysiem
This part tells you how your ETR@AM-FM stereo audio system works:
The Upper Knob
The upper knob does these three things:
It controls the volume. The VOL knob increases volume when rotated
to the right.
It lets you see what station you have. (When the radio is on, push the
knob to display the station.)
It tells you the time. (When the ignition is off, push the RECALL knob
to display the time.)
The control behind the upper knob moves the sound between
your left and
right speakers.
The Lower Knob
Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations. Push i t to get AM or FM.
The control behind the lower knob moves the sound between your
front and
rear speakers.
Tone Levers
These two levers control the tone of your radio.
BASS -Slide this lever up to increase the bass response.
TREBLE --Slide this lever LIP to increase the treble response.
Adjust this lever to give a pleasing sound. If a station is weak and noisy,
move TREBLE down to reduce the noise.
PWR (Power)
The PWR button turns your systemon and off.
3-10
Pushbuttons
The four pushbuttonslet you return to favorite stations.
You can set the pushbuttons forup to eight favorite stations (4 AM and 4
FM). Just:
Tune in the station.
0
Push SET. (SET appears in the VF display for a few seconds.)
Within 5 seconds, push one of the four pushbuttons to store the station.
Whenever you push that button, the preset station will return.
Repeat these steps for each pushbutton.
NOTE:
You can preset 3 more stations on each band by pushing a pair of buttons
next to each otherat the same time. Just:
Tune in the station.
0
Push SET. (SET appears in the VF display for a few seconds.)
0
Within 5 seconds, push two buttons next to each other at the same time.
Whenever you push that pair of buttons, the preset station will return.
Repeat thesesteps for eachpair of buttons.
Scan Button
When you push this, the radio will go to the next station and stay there a
few seconds. Thenit will go to the next station and pause, and keep doing
that. Press SCAN again to stop scanning.
Seek Button
This chooses station also, but it doesn’t keep moving as SCAN does. When
you push SEEK the radio goes to the next station and stays there.
Clock
To set the clock, just:
Push SET.
Within 5 seconds, push and hold SCAN until the correct hour appears.
Press and hold SEEK until the correct minute appears.
To display the clock with the ignition off, push the upper knob. The time
will be displayed fora few seconds.
3-1 1
How to Operate Your
E T P AM-FM Stereo Audio Cassette System
This part tells you how your ETR’ AM-FM stereo audio cassette sound
system work:
The UpperKnob
The upper knob does these four things:
It controls the volume. The VOL knob increases volume when rotated
to the right.
It lets you know what station you’re listening to. (When the radio is on,
push the knob to display the station.)
0
It tells you the time. (When the ignition is off, push the knob to display
the time.)
It allows you to near the other side of the tape. (Press knob while the
cassette is playing.)
The control behind the upper knob movesthe sound between your left and
right speakers.
The LowerKnob
Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations. Push it to get AM or FM. The
control behind the lower knob moves the sound betweenyour front and rear
speakers.
Tone Levers
These two levers control the tone of your radio.
BASS -Slide this lever up to increase the bass response.
3-12
TREBLE -Slide
this lever up to increase the treble response.
Adjust these levers to give a pleasing sound. If a station is weak and noisy,
move TREBLE down to reduce the noise.
PWR (Power)
The PWR button turns your system on and off.
DNR
This is the DynamicNoise Reduction button. It helps remove background
hiss noise from the radio ortape player. You may want to leave it pushed in
all the time.
@
DNR@is a registered trademark of National Semiconductor Corporation.
Pushbuttons
The four pushbuttonslet you return to favorite stations.
You can set the pushbuttons forup to eight favorite stations (4 AM and 4
FM). Just:
Tune in the station.
Push SET. (SET appears in the VF display for a few seconds.)
Within 5 seconds, push one of the four pushbuttons.Whenever you
push that button, the preset station will return.
Repeat these steps for
each pushbutton.
NOTE:
You can preset 3 more stations on each band by pushing a pair of buttons
next to each other at the same time. Just:
Tune in the station.
Push SET. (SET appears in the VF display for a few seconds.)
Within 5 seconds, push two buttons next to each other at the same time.
Whenever you push that pair of buttons, the preset station will return.
Repeat these steps for each pair of buttons.
Scan Button
When you push this, the radio will go to the next station and stay there a
few seconds. Then it will go to the next station and pause, and keep doing
that. Press SCAN again to stop scanning.
Seek Button
This chooses station also, but it doesn’t keep moving as SCAN does. When
you push SEEK the radio goesto the next station and stays there.
3-13
Clock
To set the clock, just:
Push SET.
Within 5 seconds, push and hold SCAN until the correct hour appears.
Press and hold SEEK until the correct minute appears.
To display the clock with the ignition off, pushthe upper knob. The time
will be displayed for a few seconds.
To Way A Cassette
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes thatare 30 to 45 minutes
long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well
in this player.
To play a cassette tape:
Have the radio on.
Insert the tape squarely through the tape door.
The longer side with the tape visible goes in first. If you hear nothing or
hear just garbled sound, it may not be in squarely. Push STOP-EJECT to
remove the tape and start over.
Once the tape is playing, use the upper andlower knobs for volume and
balance, just as you do for radio. The arrows show whichside of the tape is
playing.
0
To go forward to another part of the tape, push the button with an
arrow pointing toward the lighted arrow.To stop the tape, push the
STOP-E JECTbutton lightly.
To go backward, push the button with an arrow pointing awayfrom
the lighted arrow. To stop the tape, push theSTOP-EJECT button
lightly.
To go from one side of the tape to the other, push in the upper knob on
your radio.
To remove or stop the tape, push STOP-EJECT.
3-14
How to Operate YourET@ AM-FM Stereo Audio
Cassette System with Equalizer
This part tells you howyour ETR@AM-FM stereo audio cassette system
with equalizer works.
The Upper Knob
The upper knob does these four things:
0
It controls the volume. The VOL knob increases volume when rotated
to the right.
0
It lets you know what station you’re listening to. (When the radio is on,
push the knob to display the station.)
It tells you the time. (When the ignition is off, push the knob to display
the time.)
It allows you to hear the other side of the tape. (Press the knob while
the cassette is playing.)
The control behind the upper knob moves the sound between your left and
right speakers.
The Lower Knob
Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations. Push it to get AM or FM. The
control behind the lower knobmoves the sound between yourfront and rear
speakers.
Tone Levers (Equalizer)
The 5 levers near the upper knob control the tone of your radio.
Use the levers to set the bass, midrange, and treble until you get the sound
you prefer. The 60 and 250 levers adjust the bass; 1K is midrange; 3.5K and
1OK adjust the treble.
3- 15
PWR (Power)
The PWR button turns your system on andoff.
AM-ST Button
Push this button ifyou want AM stereo. (“STEREO” will be displayed
when you are receiving an AM stereo station.)
Cr02 Button
The Cr02 button lets you set the system for the type of cassette being used.
If you are using chrome or metal tapes, push theCr02 button in. Ifyou are
using standard iron tapes, make sure the button is out.
DNR@
Your audio system has automatic Dynamic Noise Reduction. It helps
remove background hiss noise from the radio or tape player.
DNR@is a registered trademark of the National Semiconductor
Corporation.
Pushbuttons
The four pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations.
You can set the pushbuttons for up to eight favorite stations (4 AM and
4 FM). Just:
Tune in the station.
Push SET. (SETappears in the VF display for a few seconds.)
Within 5 seconds, push one of the four pushbuttons. Whenever you
push that button, the preset station will return.
Repeat these steps for each pushbutton.
NOTE: You can preset 3 more stations on each band by pushing a pair of
buttons next to each other at the same time. Just:
Tune in the station.
Push SET. (SETappears in the VF display for a few seconds.)
Within 5 seconds, push two buttons next to each other at the same time.
Whenever you push that pairof buttons, the preset station will return.
Repeat these steps for each pair of buttons.
SCAN Button
When you push this, the radio will go to the next station and staythere a
few seconds. Then it will go to the next station and pause, and keepdoing
that. Press SCAN again to stop scanning.
SEEK Button
This chooses stations also, but it doesn’t keep moving as SCAN does. When
you push SEEK, the radio goes to the next station and stays there.
3-16
Clock
To set the clock, just:
Press SET. (SET appears in the VF display for a few seconds.)
Within 5 seconds, push and hold SCAN until the correct hour appears.
Press and hold SEEK until the correct minute appears.
To display theclock with the ignition off, push the upper knob. The time
will be displayed for afew seconds.
To Play A Cassette
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are 30 to 45 minutes
long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well
in this player.
To play a cassette tape:
Have the radio on.
Insert the tape squarely through the tape door.
The longerside with the tape visible goes in first. If you hear nothing or
hear just garbled sound,it may not be in squarely.
Push STOP-EJECT to remove the tape and start over.
Once the tape is playing, use the upper and lower knobs for volume and
balance, just asyou do for radio. The arrowsshow which side of the tape is
playing.
0
0
0
To go forward to another part of the tape, push b.
To go backward, push 4.To stop the tape, push the other button
lightly.
To go from one side of the tape to the other, push in the upper knob on
your radio. To remove or stop thetape, push STOP-EJECT.
APS (Automatic Program Search)
Press this button to activate the automatic program search. When the b
button is pressed, the tape will rapidly advance to the beginning of the next
selection. When the 4 button is pressed, the tape will rapidly reverse to the
beginning of the current selection.
Press STOP-E JECTto remove the cassette and start the radio.
3-17
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality,
ruined cassettes, or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored
in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and extreme heat. If
they aren’t, they may notoperate properly or cause failure of the tape
player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly each month or after every 15
hours of use. If you notice a reduction in sound quality,try a known good
cassette to see if the tape or the player is at fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
Clean your tape player with a wiping-action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, and follow the directions provided with it.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time.
Always make sure that the cassette tape is in good condition before you
have your tape player serviced.
3-18
How to Operate Your E T P AM-FM Stereo Audio
Compact Disc(CD) System
i
This part tells you how your ETR@AM-FM stereo system works:
Upper Knob(PWR-VOL)
The upper knob has three functions:
It switches the radio on and off when the ignition is on.
It controls the volume. Volume will increase when the RCL knob is
turned to the right and decrease when turned to the left. Volume will be
displayed briefly unless L eft/R ight speaker control, R ear/F ront
speaker control, BASS orTREB are adjusted.
0
It controls the mute feature. By pressing the MUTE knob, all sound
from the radio or CD player stops. By pressing the knob again, or by
turning the VOL knob to the right, sound will begin again.
Left/Right Speaker Control
The control ring behind the upper knob allows you to balance the sound
between the left and right speakers. Balance will be displayed briefly when
using this control.
Lower Knob
The lower knob has two functions:
0
It enables you to tune in different radio stations by turning the knob to
the right or to the left.
It enables you to alternate between AM and FM stations by pressing the
BAND knob. Your selection will be briefly displayed.
RearLFront Speaker Control
The control ring behind the lower knob fades the sound between your rear
and front speakers. Fade levels will be briefly displayed.
3-19
SEEK
Pressing the SEEK
station and stop.
button will cause the receiver to seek the next higher
Pressing the 4 SEEK button will cause the receiver to seek the nextlower
station and stop.
SCAN
When you press SCAN, the radio will go to the next station and pause, and
will keep scanning until you press SCAN again. SC will be displayed when
using this control.
Pushbuttons
The five pushbuttons let you return to favorite stations. They are also used
when you play a disc. (See “To Play A Compact Disc”.)
To set the pushbuttons for up to ten favorite stations (5 AM and 5 FM):
Tune in the desired station.
Push the SET button. (SET is displayed briefly.)
Within 5 seconds, push one of the five pushbuttons to store the station.
Whenever you press that button, the preset station will return.
Clock
To set the clock, just:
Press the SET button. The radio may be on or off.
Within 5 seconds, press and hold either SEEK to increase the
minutes or 4 SEEK to decrease the minutes until the correct minute
appears on the display.
Press and hold SCAN until the correct hour appears on the display.
RCL
Press the RCL button to alternate between time andradio station on the
display. RCL may be pressed whenthe ignition is off to see the time.
BASS
Press the BASS A to increase the bass tones and
BASS to decrease bass
tones. Press the center of the control for a preset BASS position. The bass
level will be displayed briefly when using this control.
TREBLE
Press the TREB A to increase the treble tones and TREB to decrease
the treble tones. Press the center of the control for apreset TREB position.
The treble level will be displayed briefly when using this control.
3-20
To PIay A Compact Disc(CD)
NOTICE:
Before you begin, please note:DO NOT use mini-discs that are
called singles. They won’t eject. USE FULL-SIZE COMPACT
DISCS.
If the disc player is very hot,or if you’re driving on a very rough
road, a disc may comeout or justnot play. If you seethe word
HOT on the display, the disc player is toohot to play the disc.
Press RCL to make the word HOT go off the display. When
things get back to normal, the disc should play again. Press
PWR to turn thesystem on.
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in.
Wait a few seconds and the disc should play.
If the disc comesback out, check whether:
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched, or wet.
Too much moisture is in the air. (If there is, wait about one hour and try
again.)
RCL
Press RCL to see what track is playing. Press it again within 5 seconds to
see how long it has been playing. The track number also appears when you
change the volume or when a new track starts to play.
0
COMP
Press the COMP button to make soft and loud passages more nearly equal
in volume. COMP appears in the display while using this command.
RDM
The RDM button means random and when it is pressed, it causes the CD
mechanism to play the tracks in a random order rather than in the sequential
1,2,3 order.
REV
Press and hold the REV button to quickly return to a favorite passage. The
counter reading will be displayed when using this control.
FWD
Press and hold the FWD button to advance quickly within a track. Release it
to resume playing. Watch the display to stop at a specific passage.
3-21
SCAN
Press SCAN to sample each track for approximately 10 seconds. Scanning
will continue until the RDM, SCAN or any other motion button is pressed
again.
PREV
If you hold the PREV (4.SEEK ) button, or press it more than once, the
disc will return to previous tracks.
NEXT
Press NEXT (SEEK ) to hear the next track now instead of waiting until
the present track is finished. If you hold this button or press it more than
once, the disc will advance further.
ST-PL
Press ST-PL (Stop-Play) to make the disc stop and the radio play. Press
ST-PL again to restart the disc atthe point where it stopped.
Press PWR or turn the ignition key offto stop the disc player.The disc
stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped.
Press EJCT to eject the disc and makethe radio play. The disc will start at
track 1 when you reinsert it.
Anti-Theft Feature
Delco LOC II@is an Anti-Theft feature for the compact disc player. It can
be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally. Ifit is used, your
player won’t be usable if it is ever stolen, because it won’t turn on.
The instructions below tell you how to enter a secret code into the system. If
your car loses battery power for any reason, you must unlock the system
with the secret code before the radio will turn on.
To Lock The System:
1. Write down any 6 digit number and keepit in a safe place.
2. Turn the ignition to the ACC (Accessory) or RUN position.
3. Press the PWR button to turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until
“-
- -”
shows
on the display.
You are now ready to enter your secret code. Don’t wait more than
15 seconds between steps.
5. Press SET and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press the SEEK
or 4 button to make the first number appear.
7 . Press SCAN to make the last two numbersagree with your code.
3-22
8. Press BAND and 000 will appear again. Now you are ready to enter the
last three digits of your code.
9. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the last three digits of your code.
10. Press BAND and rEP will appear for 5 seconds and then 000 will
appear.
11. Repeat steps 6 through 10. This time SEC will appear-indicating that
the radio is secure.
To Unlock The System AfterA Power Loss
When battery power is reapplied to a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on
and LOC will appear on the display.
Enter your secret code as follows: pause no more than 15 seconds between
steps .
1. Turn the ignition on. (Radio off.)
2. Depress the SET button. The display will show 000.
3. Enter the six digits of the code following steps 6-9 above. The display
will show the numbers as entered.
4. Depress the BAND knob and the time appears - indicating that the
disabling sequence was successful. If the display indicates SEC, the
numbers did not match and the unit is stillsecured.
Disabling The Theft System
1. Depress presets 1 and 4 for 5 seconds with ignition on and radio power
off. The display will show SEC, indicating the unit is in the secure
mode.
2. Depress the SET button. The display will show 000.
3. Enter the first three digits of the code following steps 6 and 7 of the
preceding paragraphs. The display will show the numbers as entered.
4. Depress the BAND knob. The radio will display 000.
5. Enter the second three digits of the code. Thedisplay will show the
numbers as entered.
6. Depress the BAND knob. If the display shows “- - - ”, the disabling
sequence was successful. The numbers matched the user-selected code
or the factory back-up code, and the unit is in the UNSECURED mode.
If the display shows SEC, the disabling sequence was unsuccessful and
the numbers did not match either of the codes and the unit will remain
in the SECURED mode.
3-23
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is
soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handlingdiscs. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges orthe edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand mostcar washes without being
damaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent, you can straighten it
out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the
fender.
3-24
Your Driving and the Road
Section
Here you'll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in
varying weather conditions . We've also included many other useful tips on
driving.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Steering Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
Driving Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Off-Road Driving With Your Four-wheel Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
DrivingatNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Driving in the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Freeway Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
CityDriving
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Recreational Vehicle Towing (Four-wheel Drive Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
TowingaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-1
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up.
(See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets,
rural roads, or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do.Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they
are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the bestdefensive
driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy.
It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year. Alcohol takes away three things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths
involve alcohol - a driver, a passenger or someone else, such as a
pedestrian, had been drinking. In most cases, these deaths are the result of
someone who was drinking and driving. About 20,000 motor
vehicle-related deaths occur each year because of alcohol, and thousandsof
people are injured.
Just how much alcohol istoo much if a person plans to drive? Ideally, no
one should drink alcohol and then drive. But if one does, then what’s “too
much”? It can be a lot less than many mightthink. Although it depends on
each person and situation, hereis some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Content (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends
upon four things:
How much alcohol is in the drink.
The drinker’s body weight.
The amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking.
The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol.
4-2
According to the American Medical Association, a 180-pound (82 kg)
person who drinks three 12-ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will
end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same
BAC by drinking three &ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed
drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or
vodka.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person
drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an
hour, the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have a slightly lower
BAC level.
NUMBER
OF DRINKS
(as in picture)
1 HOUR
The law in most U.S. states sets the legal limit ata BAC of 0.10 percent. In
Canada the limit is 0.08 percent, and in some other countries it’s lower than
that. The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one
hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
4-3
But it’s very importantto keep in mind that the abilityto drive is affected
well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at aBAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the
effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05
percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in an accident increases
sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with
a BAC level of 0.06 percent (three beers in one hour for a 180-pound or 82
kg person) has doubled hisor her chance of having an accident. At a BAC
level of 0.10 percent, the chance of that driver having an accident is six
times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chances are twenty-five times
greater! And, the body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol inone
drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up.
“I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. Whatif there’s an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with a
higher BAC might not beable to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that many people don’t
know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s systemcan make
crash injuries worse. That’s especially truefor brain, spinal cord and heart
injuries. That means that if anyone who has been drinking- driver or
passenger - is in a crash, the chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher thanif that person hadnot been drinking. And we’ve
already seen that the chance of a crash itself is higherfor drinking drivers.
4-4
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go.
They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have
to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of
those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. Thatmeans you
can lose control of your vehicle.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That’s perception time.
Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It
might be less with one driverand as long as two or three seconds ormore
with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a
second, a vehiclemoving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space
between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distancesvary greatly with the surface of the
road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry,
icy); tire tread; and the condition of your brakes.
4-5
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts - heavy
acceleration followed by heavy braking - rather than keeping pacewith
traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy
braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better
braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t
pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If
your engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will
use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer
to stop and the brake pedal will be harderto push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has an advanced electronic braking system that can help you
keep it under control. When you start your vehicle and beginto drive away,
you may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise. This is the ABS system
testing itself.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s saythe road is wet. You’re driving safely.
Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens withABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is
about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each
front wheel and at the rear wheels.The anti-lock system can change the
brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most ofavailable tire and roadconditions. You can steer around
the obstacle while braking hard.
4-6
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and
controls braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up
to the brake pedal. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you
won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or
stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
To Use Four-wheel Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down and let anti-lock
work for you. You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some
noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
Use your anti-lock braking system when you need to. With anti-lock, you
can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can
help you more than even the very best braking.
4-7
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is
not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control”accidents mentioned on the news happen
on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of
physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in
the samedirection. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wetice, you’ll
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly
accelerate. Both control systems - steering and acceleration - have to do
their work where the tires meet theroad. Adding the sudden acceleration
can demand too much of those places. You can lose control,
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal,
steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of
course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you
enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of thecurve,
and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.
4-8
Steering in Emergencies
There are timeswhen steering can bemore effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and find atruck stopped in your lane, or acar
darts out frombetween parked
suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by
braking -if you can stopin time. But sometimesyou can’t; there isn’t
room. That’s the time for evasive action
- steering around the problem.
The factthat such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason
to practice defensivedriving at all times andwear safety belts properly.
4-9
Off-Road Recovery
You may find sometime that your rightwheels have dropped off theedge of
a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery
should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in
the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheel up to 1/4 turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the
roadway.
1. Edge of Road
Surface
2. Slow Down
3. LeftApprox.
Quarter Turn
4. Recover
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits
for justthe right moment, accelerates, moves aroundthe vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the rightlane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a
potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies thesame
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the
passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents - the
head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides, andto crossroads for
situations that might affect your passing patterns.If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, waitfor a better time.
4- 10
0
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and lines. If you can see a
sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your
pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your
side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
0
Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you’re
awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly
slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
0
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but
stay in the right lane and don’t get tooclose. Time your move so you
will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane.
If the way is clear to pass, you will have a “running start” that more
than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And
if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only
slow down and drop back again and waitfor another opportunity.
0
If other cars are lined up topass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But
take carethat someone isn’t trying to pass youas you pull out to pass
the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.
0
Check your mirrors , glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane
change signal before moving out of the rightlane to pass. When you
are farenough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your inside
mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the
right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The
vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it
really is.)
0
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads.
Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.
0
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the
brake lights are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
0
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get
ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three
control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to dowhat the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an
escape route or area of less danger.
4- 11
Skidding
In a skid, a drivercan lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your Vehicle’s three control systems.
In the braking skid your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering
skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the
driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and
quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering
quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reducedwhen water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material
is on the road. For safety,you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surfacewith reduced traction, try your best to avoid
sudden steering, acceleration, or braking (including enginebraking by
shifting to a lowergear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues - such as enough water, ice or packed
snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface” - and slow down when you
have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock braking system (ABS) helps avoid only the
braking skid.
Driving Guidelines
This multipurpose passenger vehicle is defined as
a utility vehicle in
Consumer Information Regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA)of the United States Department of
Transportation. Utility vehicles have higher ground
clearance and a narrower
track to make themcapable of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics give thema higher center of
gravity than ordinary cars.An advantage of the higher ground clearance isa
better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems. They are not
designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-wheel drive
vehicles any more thanlow-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers.As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
4-12
Off-Road Driving with Your Four-wheel Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel drive.
Also, see“Anti-lock Brakes” in the Index.
If your vehicle doesn’thave four-wheel drive, you shouldn’t drive off-road
unless you’re on a level, solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have some definite hazards.
The greatest of these is the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North American road system
behind. Traffic lanes aren’t marked. Curves aren’t banked. Thereare no
road signs. Surfaces canbe slippery, rough, uphill or downhill.In short,
you’ve gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves somenew skills. And that’s why it’s very
important that you read this guide. You’ll find many driving tips and
suggestions. Thesewill help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are somethings to do before you go out. For example, be sure to have
all necessary maintenance and service work done. Be sure you read all the
information aboutyour four-wheel drive vehicle in this manual. Is there
enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where
they should be? What are the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you’ll be driving? If you don’t know, you should check with law
enforcement people in the area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If
so, be sure to get the necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important thingsto remember about how to load your
vehicle.
The heaviest thingsshould be on the load floor and forward of your
rear axle. Put heavier itemsas far forward as you can.
Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on the off-road terrain
doesn’t toss things around.
4-13
You’ll find other important information in this manual. See “ Vehicle
Loading,” “ Luggage Carrier” and “Tires” in the Index.
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially whengoing to a remote area.
Know the terrain and plan your route. You are much less likely to get bad
surprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any
blocked or closed roads.
It’s also a good idea to travel with at leastone other vehicle. If something
happens to one of them, the other can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch?If so, be sure to read the winch
instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy
if you get stuck. But
you’ll want to know how to use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’ssafe and close to home before
you go into the wilderness. Off-road driving does require some new and
different driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes, for example, need
to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpectedobstacles. Your ears need to
listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands, feet, and
body you’ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
4-14
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving. One of
the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some
things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:
you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for
obstacles.
you have less time to react.
0
you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles.
0
you’ll need more distance for braking, especially since you’re on an
unpaved surface.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain.You
need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features. Here are
some things to consider.
Surface Conditions.Off-roading can take you over hard-packed dirt,
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects
the steering, acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different ways.
Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience
slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and
longer braking distances.
Surface Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. A rock,
log, hole, rut, or bump can startle you if you’re not prepared for them. Often
these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of
the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:
Is the path ahead clear?
0
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
0
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? (There’s more discussion
of these subjects later.)
0
Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly?
When you drive overobstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm grip on the
steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface features can jerk the wheel
out of your hands if you’re not prepared.
4-15
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, your wheels can
leave the ground. If this happens, even with one or two wheels, you can’t
control the vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s especially important to
avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns, or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving
on paved roads and highways. There are no road signs, posted speed limits
or signal lights. You have to useyour own good judgment about what is safe
and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road. And this is
certainly true for off-road driving. At the very time you need special
alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious - or
even fatal -accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has
been drinking. (See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.)
Driving On Ofl-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a hill. Driving safely
on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle
can and can’t do. There are some hills that simply can’t be driven, no matter
how well built the vehicle.
1
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one of those hills that’s
just too steep to climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard tojudge.
On a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant incline
with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way
to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top,
but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes,
grass, or shrubs.
4-16
Here are some other things to consider asyou approach a hill.
0
Is there a constantincline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places?
0
Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface causetire
slipping?
0
Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won’t have to make
turning maneuvers?
0
Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path (boulders,
trees, logs or ruts)?
0
What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment, adrop-off, a
fence? Getout and walk the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way
to find out.
0
Is the hill simply too rough? Steephills often have ruts, gullies, troughs
and exposedrocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of
erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you need to take Some
special steps.
0
Use a low gear and get a firm gripon the steering wheel.
0
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. Don’t use
more power than you need, because you don’t want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
0
Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If the path twists and
turns, you might want to find another route.
0
Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill.
0
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching
traffic on trails or hills.
0
Sound thehorn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing
traffic know you’re there.
0
Use your headlights even during theday. They make you more visible
to oncoming traffic.
4- 17
-
1’
Q: What shouldI do if my vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, andI
can’t make it up the hill?
A:
If this happens, there are some things you should do, and there are
should do:
some things you must not do. First, here’s what you
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling
backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.
If your engine is still running, shift the transmission into reverse,
release the parking brake, and slowly back downthe hill in reverse.
If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to restart it. With the
brake pedal depressed and the parking brake still applied, shiftthe
transmission to “P” (Park) (or, shift to “N” (Neutral) if your vehicle has
a manual transmission) and restart theengine. Then, shift to reverse,
release the parking brake, and slowly back down thehill as straight as
possible in reverse.
e As you are backing down the hill, putyour left hand on the steering
wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This way, you’ll be able to tell if your
wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you
back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than
in the left or
right direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will
increase the possibility of a rollover.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or are about to stall,
when going up ahill.
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into “N” (Neutral) (or
depressing the clutch, if you have a manual transmission)to “rev-up”
the engine and regain forward momentum. This won’t work. Your
vehicle will roll backwards very quickly andyou could go out of
control .
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then apply the parking
brake. Shift into reverse, release the parking brake, and slowly back straight
down.
4-18
0
Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a
hill. If the hill issteep enough to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up the
hill, you must back straight down the hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling,I try to back down the hill and decide I just
can’t doit. What should I do?
A:
Set the parking brake, put your transmission in ‘ 4 P ’ (Park) (or the
manual transmission in first gear) , and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of
the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the
transfer case to “N” (Neutral) when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in
some gear.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to consider a number of
things:
0
How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control?
0
What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? Hard-packed dirt?
Gravel?
0
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Boulders?
0
What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a
river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to keep your vehicle
headed straight down, and use a low gear. This way, engine drag can help
your brakes and they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
4- 19
Q: Are there some thingsI should notdo when driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore them you could lose
control and have a serious accident.
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you across the incline of
the h11. A hill that’s not too steepto drive down may be too steep to
drive across. You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down.
Never go downhill with the transmission in “N” (Neutral) ,or with the
clutch pedal depressed in a manual shift . This is called
“free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A:
It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if it happens going
downhill, here’s what to do.
Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes. Apply the parking
brake.
Shift to “P’ (Park) (orto Neutral with the manual transmission) and,
while still braking, restart the engine.
Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight
down.
If the enginewon’t start, get out and get help.
4-20
Driving Acrossan Incline
Sooner orlater, an off-road trail will probably go acrossthe incline of a hill.
If this happens, you have to decide whether to try to drive acrossthe incline.
Here are some thingsto consider:
0
A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive
across. When you go straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base (the distancefrom the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the
likelihood thevehicle will tumble end over end.But when you drive
across an incline, the much more narrow track width (the distance
between the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle from
tilting and rolling over. Also, driving acrossan incline puts more
weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill slide or a
rollover.
0
Surface conditionscan be a problem when you drive across a hill.
Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause your tires to
slip sideways, downhill.If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit
something that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.
0
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse. If
you drive across arock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill
wheels drop into a rut or depression,your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive
across an incline. Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean
you have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
Q: What if I’m driving acrossan incline
that’s nottoo steep, but I hit
I do?
some loose gravel and start to slide downhill. What should
At
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This
should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping.
However, a much better way to prevent this is to get out and “walk the
course” so you know what the surface is like before you drive it.
4-21
Stalling on an lncline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be sure you (and your
passengers) get out on the uphill side, evenif the door there is harder to
open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle startsto roll over,
you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk downthe slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take
if it does roll over.
Driving In Mud, Sand, Snow,Or lce
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels won’t get good traction.
You can’t accelerate as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you’ll need
longer braking distances.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud - the deeper the mud, the
lower the gear. In really deep mud, the idea is tokeep your vehicle moving
so you don’t get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel traction. But it will
depend upon how loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on
beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand.This has an
effect on steering, accelerating, and braking. You may want to reduce the air
pressure in your tires slightly when driving onsand. This will improve
traction.
4-22
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction. On these surfaces,
it’s very easy to lose control. On wet ice, for example,the traction is so poor
that you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving, poor
steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control.
Driving In Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems. But heavy rain can
mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it. If it’s deep
enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, don’t try it - you
probably won’t get through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle and
other vehicleparts.
If the water isn’t too deep,then drive through it slowly. At fast speeds,water
splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also
occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your tailpipe is
under water, you’ll never be ableto start your engine. When you gothrough
water, remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to
stop.
4-23
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody, chassis or
under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake liningscleaned and checked.
These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Checkthe body
structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system for
damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off-road use. Refer
to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some
drivers are likely to be impaired - by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
Don’t drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlights
behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more
space between you and other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlights can light
up only so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.
4-24
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these
differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the samething at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can alsoaffect your night vision. For example,
if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.
Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving,
don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from
headlights, but they also make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching lights. It can take a second
or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlights), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching lights.
Keep your windshield and all theglass on your vehicle clean - inside and
out. Glare atnight is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even theinside
of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights
dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your
eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlights light up farless of a roadway when you are
in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out
dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlights should be checked regularly
for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers
suffer from night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and aren’t
even aware of it.
Driving inthe Rain
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road you can’t stop,
accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as
on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’llget even
4 - 7.5
less traction. It’s always wiseto go slower and be cautious if rain starts to
fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harderit is to see. Even if your windshield wiper
blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs
and traffic signals, pavement markings, theedge of the road, and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your
windshield washer tank filled. Replaceyour windshield wiper inserts when
they show signs of streakingor missing areas on the windshield, or when
strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some
car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try
to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can buildup under your tires
that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it
has little or no contact with the road.
4-26
Hydroplaning doesn’thappen often. But it can if your tires haven’t much
tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water
is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple”the water’s surface, there
could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and
fast rule about hydroplaning. Thebest advice is to slow down when it is
raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Turn on your low-beam headlights - not just your parking lights - to
help make you more visible to others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra followingdistance. And be
especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more
clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road
spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.)
City Driving
x
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amountof traffic on
them. You’ll want to watchout for what the other drivers are doing and pay
attention to traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and
plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
4-27
0
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll
save time and energy. (See the next section, “Freeway Driving.”)
0
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because
the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just
before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.
Freeway Driving
-.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways,
turnpikes, or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their
own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and
keep to theright. Drive at the same speed most ofthe other drivers are
driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance there is usually aramp that leads to the freeway.If you have
a clear view of the freewayas you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Tryto determine where you expectto blend
with the flow. Try to mergeinto the gap atclose to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your
shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the
prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turnsignal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make
sure there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” spot.
4-28
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable
following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in
advance. If you miss your exit do not, under any circumstances, stopand
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp canbe curved, sometimes quitesharply.
The exit speedis usually posted.
Reduce your speed accordingto your speedometer, not to your sense of
any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to
motion. After driving for
think you are going slowerthan you actually are.
Before Leavingon a Long Trip
Make sure you’reready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you’re
not fresh - such asafter a day’s work - don’t plan to make too many
miles that first part of the journey.Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained,
it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of
course, you’ll find experiencedand able service expertsin GM dealerships
all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need
it.
Here are some thingsyou can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windows clean
inside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels?
Lights: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Tires: They are vitally important to asafe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread
good enough for long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route?
Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-29
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually sucha condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain
falling asleep at the wheel? Callit highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery,
along with the hum ofthe tires on the road, thedrone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that canmake you sleepy. Don’t letit
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leavethe road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can
happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool
interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check
your mirrors and your instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service, or parking area
and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or
rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there,
here are some tips that can make your trips safer and moreenjoyable. (See
“Off-Road Driving” in the Index for information about driving off-road.)
4-30
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the
brakes, tires, cooling system and transmission. Theseparts can work
hard on mountain roads.
0
Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this:
let your engine do someof the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear
when you go down a steep orlong hill.
0
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear.
The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission, and you can
climb the hill better.
0
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or
mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut acrossthe center of the road. Drive
at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.
0
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in
your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
0
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special
problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a
falling rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-31
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. Be sure your engine
coolant mix is correct.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brushor broom, a supply of windshield
washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,
a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand,a piece of old
carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or /ce
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have
good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, youcan
have a very slippery situation. You’ll have lot
a less traction or “grip” and
will need to be very careful.
4-32
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be
slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get “wet ice” when it’s about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even
more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your ability to make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See
“Anti-lock” in the Index.
0
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot
that’s covered with ice. On anotherwise clear road, ice patches may
appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a
curve or an overpass may remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it.
Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
4-33
If You’re Caught ina Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You
should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do
to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: Turn on your
hazard flashers. Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve
been stopped by the snow. Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats -anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-34
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run
the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps
the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery (or batteries) to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlights.
Let theheater run for awhile.
Then, shut the engineoff and close the window almost all the wayto
preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve
the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the
vehicle and do somefairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
Recreational VehicleTowing
(Four-wheel Drive Only)
If your vehicle has 4-wheel drive, you may tow it behind another vehicle
providing it does not have the optional electronic shift transfer case.
Recreational vehicle towingis not recommendedfor vehicles
with the optional electronic shift transfer case because the
electronic shift has no neutral position.
4-35
Before towing, you should:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Place the automatic transmission in "P" (Park) orthe manual
transmission in the lowest gear (1st gear).
3. Firmly attach the vehicle being towed to the towvehicle. Refer to the
hitch manufacturer's instructions.
4. Place the transfer case shift lever in "N" (Neutral).
NOTICE:
Removal of either propeller shaft is unnecessary.
1. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly
attached to the tow vehicle.
2. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it one notch
forward of the LOCK position. This places the key into the OFF
position, which unlocks the steering column while preventing battery
drain. Unlocking the steering column will allow for proper movement
of the front wheeldtires during towing.
NOTICE:
You should exercise extra care whenever towing another vehicle.
4-36
Towing a Trailer
NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result
in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer
correctly, follow the advice in this section,
and see your GM
dealer for important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Every vehicle is ready for sometrailer towing. If it was built with trailering
options, as many are, it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in
handling, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this section. In it are many time-tested, important
trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you
pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
0
There are many different laws having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be
driving. A good source forthis information can be state or provincial
police.
Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh 2,000 pounds
(900 kg) or less. You should always use a sway control if your trailer
will weigh more than 2,000 pounds (900 kg).
You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
4-37
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) your new
vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t
drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t makestarts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude,
road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicleis used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can
write us at the address listed in your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to General Motorsof Canada Limited, Customer
Assistance Center, 1908 Colonel Sam Drive, Oshawa, Ontario LlH 8P7.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measure
because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle.The gross vehicle
weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, anycargo you may
carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will
tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the
Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
A
B
4-38
If you’re using a “dead-weight” hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh
10% of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you have a
“weight-distributing” hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12% of the
total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to
get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the limit for cold tires. You’ll find
these numbers on the Certification label on the driver’s door lock pillar or
see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than
2,000 pounds (900 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted,
weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. This
equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good
handling when you’re driving.
0
Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see
“Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt and water can, too.
If your vehicle has a deadweight hitch and a endgate-mounted spare tire,
and your trailer has a winch or tongue jack, you could have interference
between them.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will
not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the
trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with
your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
4-39
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 pounds (450 kg) loaded, then it needs
its own brakes - and they must be adequate.Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Your trailer brakes system can tap into vehicle’s hydraulic brake system
except:
Don’t tap intoyour vehicle’s brake systemif the trailer’s brake system will
use more than 0.02 cubic inch ( 0 . 3 ~of
~ )fluid from your vehicle’s master
cylinder. If it does, both braking systems won’t work well.You could even
lose your brakes.
Will the trailer parts take 3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure? If not, the
trailer brake system must not be used with your vehicle.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake fluid tapat the port on
the master cylinder that sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t usecopper
tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel brake
tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you’ll wantto get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself
with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind thatthe vehicle you are driving is now a good
deal longer and not nearly so responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check thetrailer hitch and platform, safetychains,
electrical connector, lights, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets
you check your electrical connection at the same time.
4-40
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and
that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working.
Following Disfance
Stay at least twice asfar behind the vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that
require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer.
And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the
trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guideyou.
4-41
Making Turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal.Do this
so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towinga Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle hasto have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lights will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash
for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think
drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot andno longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down andreduce your speed to around 45 mph
(70 k d h ) to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission overheating.
If you have an automatic transmission, you should use “D”when towing a
trailer. Operating your vehicle in “D” when towing a trailer will minimize
heat buildup and extend the life of your transmission. Or, if you have a
manual transmission with fifth gear, it’s better not to use fifth gear,
just
drive in fourth gear (or, as you need to, a lower gear).
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, witha trailer attached, on a hill. If
something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can beinjured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig ona hill, here’s how todo it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into “P” (Park) yet, or into
gear fora manual transmission.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the
chocks absorb the load.
4-42
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then
shift into “P” (Park), or “R” (Reverse) for a manual transmission.
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with a manual transfer case
shift lever, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear-not in “N”
(Neutral).
6. Release the parking brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parkingon a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you:
Start your engine;
0
Shift into a gear; and
0
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
4-43
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See
the Maintenance Schedulefor more on this. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil,axle lubricant, belt, cooling system,and brake
adjustment. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help
you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to reviewthese
sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Trailer Light Wiring
See “Trailer Wiring Harness” in the Index.
Power Winches
If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only use it when your
vehicle is stationary or anchored.
!
NOTICE:
When operating a power winch on your vehicle always leave the
l transmission in the neutral position.Do not leave an automatic
transmission inP (Park) ora manual transmission in gear or the
transmission may be damaged.
~
Use the regular brakes,set the parking brake or block the wheels tokeep
your vehicle from rolling.
4-44
Seciion
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Other Warning Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Hazard Warning Flasher
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 5-3
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 5-11
Engine Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Changing a Flat Tire ....................
If You’re Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Engine Overheating
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning
flashers let you warn
others. They also let
police know you have
1 a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal
lights will flash on
and off.
~
Press the button in to
make your front and
rear turn signal lights
flash on and off. Your
hazard warning
flashers work no
matter what position
your key is in, and
even if the key isn’tin.
To turn off the
flashers, pull out on
the collar.
When the hazard
warning flashers are
on, your turn signals
won’t work.
5-2
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road
about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some
jumper cablesto start your vehicle. But please follow the steps below to do
it safely.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your
vehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty.
~
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it could damage
your vehicle, evenif you have a manual transmission. Andif you
have an automatic transmission, it won’t start that way.
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
1. Check the othervehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative
ground system.
NOTICE:
If the othersystem isn’ta 12-volt system witha negative
ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-3
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be
sure thevehicles aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could cause a
ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start you1
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.
You could be injured if the vehicles roll. Set the parking brake firmly
on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in “P’ (Park) or a
manual transmission in “N” (Neutral). If you have a four-wheel-drive
vehicle with a manual transfer case shift lever, be sure the transfer case
is not in “N” (Neutral).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Turn off all lights that aren’t
needed, and radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save your radio!
~~
~~~
NOTICE:
If you leave your radioon, it could be badly damaged. The
repairs wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive (+) and
negative (-) terminals on each battery.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose ormissing insulation. If
they do, you could get a shock. Thevehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should
know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to
5-4
negative (-) or a metal engine part. Don’t connect (+) to (-) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too.
6. Connect the redpositive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
vehicle with the dead battery.
Battery
Dead
Good Battery (+)
(+)
I
7. Don’t let the otherend touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+)
terminal of the good battery.
8. Now connect theblack negative (-) cable to the good battery’s negative
(-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The otherend
of the negative cableduesn ’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy
unpainted metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the deadbattery.
5-5
Good Battery (-)
Heavy Metal Engine Part
P
9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as
good there, but thechance of sparks getting backto the battery is much
less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run theengine for a
while.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.If it won't start after a few
tries, it probably needs service.
12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take
care that they don't touch each other or any other metal.
Remove Cables In This Order:
2
3
1 . HeavyMetal
Engine Part
2 . Good Battery (-)
3. Good Battery (+)
4. Dead Battery (+)
5-6
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have a GM dealer or a professional towing service tow your vehicle.
They can provide the right equipment and know how to tow it without
damage.
If your vehicle has been changed since it was factory-new by adding things
like foglamps, aero skirting, or special tires and wheels, these things could
be damaged during towing.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
0
That your vehicle has rear-wheel drive, or that it has the four-wheel
drive option.
The make, model, and year of your vehicle.
0
Whether you can move the shift lever for the transmission and shift the
transfer case, if you have one.
0
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
5-7
When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key off. The steering
wheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position with a clamping
device designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle’s steering
column lock for this. The transmission (either automatic or manual) should
be in “ N ’ (Neutral) and the transfer case (eithermanual shift or electronic
shift), if you have one, should be in 2 WHEEL (two-wheel drive). The
parking brake should be released.
5-8
Towing Fromthe Front
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or the front bumper
system will be damaged.
Use wheel lift or car-carrier equipment.
Additional ramping may be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use safety chains and wheel straps.
If your vehicle has the four-wheel drive option, a dolly MUST be
used under the rearwheels when towingfrom the front.
5-9
Towing From the Rear
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-type equipment or the rear bumper
system will be damaged.
Use wheel liftor car-carrier equipment.
Additional ramping may be required for car-carrier equipment.
Use safety chains and wheel straps.
If your vehicle has the four-wheel drive option,
a dolly MUST be
used under the frontwheels when towingfrom the rear.
Don’t have your vehicle towed on therear wheels, unless you have to. If the
vehicle must be towed on the rear wheels, don’t go more than 35 mph (56
km/h) or farther than 50 miles (80 km) or your transmission will be
damaged. If these limits must beexceeded, then the rear drive wheels have
to be supported on a dolly.
5-10
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle's instrument
panel.
lf Steam /sComing From Your Engine
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with
no
coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
5-11
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may
not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute
or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the
window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to “N” (Neutral).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe,
drive slower for about ten minutes. If the warning doesn’tcome back on,
you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push the accelerator until the engine speed is
about twice as fast as normal idle speed. Bring the engine speed back to
normal idle speed after two or three minutes. Now see if the warning stops.
But then, if you still have thewarning, TURN OFF THE ENGINE AND
GET EVERYONE OUT OF THE VEHICLE until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.
When you decide it’s
safe to lift the hood,
here’s what you’ll see:
A. Coolantrecovery
tank
B. Radiator pressure
cap
C.Enginefan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything
else until it cools down.
5-12
B'
The coolantlevel should be at or abovethe ADD mark. If it isn't, you may
have a leakin the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere elsein the cooling system.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn't
covered by your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See if the fan speed
increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down.
If it doesn't, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery Tank
If you haven't found aproblem yet, but the coolant level isn't at or above
the ADD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean water (preferably distilled)
and a properantifreeze at the coolant recovery tank. (See "Engine Coolant"
in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mix.)
5-13
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator,
heater coreand other parts.Use the recommended coolant.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or above the the ADD
mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You
can add the proper coolant mix directly to the radiator but besure the
cooling system is cool before you do it.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system,
including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly to the left until it first stops. (Don't
press down while turning thepressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
5-15
2. Thenkeep
turning the
pressure cap, but
now push down
as you turn it.
Remove the
pressure cap.
r
3. Fill the radiator
with the proper
mix, up to the
base of the filler
neck.
4. Then fill the
coolant recovery
tank to the ADD
mark.
I -
5-16
5 . Put the cap back
on the coolant
recovery tank,
but leave the
radiator pressure
cap off'.
6. Start the engine
and let it run until
you can feel the
upper radiator
hose getting hot.
Watch out for the
engine fan.
7. By this time the coolant level inside the filler neck may be lower. If the
level is lower, add more of the proper mix through thefiller neck until
the level reaches the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the
pressure cap. At
any time during
this procedure if
coolant begins to
flow out of the
filler neck,
reinstall the
pressure cap. Be
sure the arrows
on pressure cap
line up like this.
5-17
Engine Fan Noise
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the clutch isengaged,
the fan spins fasterto provide more air to cool the engine. In most every day
driving conditions the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel economy
and reduces fan noise.Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towingand/or
high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases when the clutch engages.
So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should notbe
mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the
cooling system functioning properly. The fan will slow down when
additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start theengine. It will go away
as the fan clutch disengages.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’redriving, especially if you
maintain your tires properly. Ifair goes out ofa tire, it’s much more likelyto
leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, then gently braketo a
stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may
require the same correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under controlby
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and
noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if
possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next section shows how to use yourjacking equipment
to change a flat tire safely.
5-18
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a
level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers.
T
L Blocked Tire
The following steps will tell you how to use the jackand change a tire.
5-19
Your jack, wheel wrench and wheel blocksare stored in your vehicle's rear
area, along the left wall.
To remove your jack
cover on two-door
models, turn the
plastic wing nutto the
left until you can pull
it out. Remove the
jack cover.
To remove your jack
b U V C 1 U11 four-door
.
models, plull up on the
latch and remove the
jack cover. Pull the
wheel blocks,jack and
wheel wrench off.
t l A T 7 - V
c
I
5-20
n m
Jacking Tool Storage (Two-Door Models)
1. Jack
2. Nut
3. Wheel Blocks
4. Cover
5. Rubber Band
6. WheelWrench
Jacking Tool Storage (Four-Door Models)
I
1. Wheel Blocks
2. Eye Bolt
3. Rubberband
4. Cover (Rear-Mounted only)
5. Cover
6. Bolt
7. Wheel Wrench
8. Retainer
9. Jack
5-21
Side-Mounted Spare Tire (Two-Door Models except P235/75R15 Tire)
1. Hook
1
2.Valve Stem
(Pointed
Outboard)
3
3. Nut
4. Retainer
(2-wheel drive)
5. Retainer
(4-wheel drive)
6. Spare Tire
Rear-Mounted Spare Tire (Two-Door Models)
1. ValveStem
(Pointed
Rearward)
2. WheelCarrier
3. Spare Tire
4. WheelNut
Floor-Mounted Spare Tire (P235/75R15 TireTwo-Door Models)
Steel Wheel:
1 . Nut
2.Retainer
3. Valve Stem
(Pointed Up)
4. Hook
5. Spare Tire
5-22
Aluminum Wheel:
I . Nut
2.Retainer
3. Valve Stem
(Pointed Down)
4. Hook
5. Spare Tire
Rear-Mounted Spare Tire (Four-Door Models)
1. Valve Stem
(Pointed
Rearward)
2. Wheel Carrier
3. Spare Tire
4. Whee:1Nut
4
Inside-Mounted Spare Tire (Four-Door Models)
1 . Hook
2. Spare Tire
3. Nut
4.Retainer
(2-Wheel Drive)
5 . Retainer
(4-Wheel Drive)
6 . ValveStem
(Pointed
Outboard)
?
7. Wheel Carrier
5-23
Spare Tire
Your spare tire is in your vehicle's rear area, either mounted to the left wall,
the floor, or the endgate.
If you have a left-wall or floor-mounted spare tire, the tire must be
removed in order to have access to the jack storage.
TORemove the Side-Mounted or Floor-Mounted Spare Tire
Reach into your tire's
cover and unscrew the
wingnut at thecenter
of the wheel. Remove
it and the retainer.
Unhook the tire from
the mounting bracket
and remove the cover.
To Remove the Endgate-Mounted Spare Tire
5-24
Use the socket end of
your wheel wrench to
remove the wheel nuts
that secure thetire to
the carrier. Then, lift
the tire off its
mounting bracket.
Changing theTire
Start with the jack,
wheel wrench and
wheel blocks.
Rotate the jackhandle
to the right. That will
raise the jacklifthead
a little.
5-25
e
Before you start,
block the front and
rear of the tirefarthest
away from the one
being changed. Put
your spare tire near
the flat tire.
Hub Caps And Wheel Nut Caps
You will have to take off hub caps or wheel nut caps to reach your wheel
nuts.
If you have individual
wheel nut caps that
cover each nut, they
must be removedin
order to get the wheel
nuts. Use thesocket
end of the wheel
wrench
to remove the
I
wheel nut caps.
Your wheel nut caps may attach yourhub cap to the wheel. Remove these
wheel nut caps before you takeoff the hub cap.
If you have just an aluminum or plastic molded hub cap, pry it off with the
chisel end of your wheel wrench.
5-26
k
,
Some of the molded
plastic hub caps have
imitation wheel nuts
molded into them. The
wheel wrench won’t
fit these imitation
nuts, so don’t try to
remove them with the
socket end of the
wheel wrench.
...
Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts. Don’t remove them yet.
Position the jackunder the vehicle.
ce,
A
B-
AA
A
B
A. Front Frame Hole
B. Rear Frame Hole
Your vehicle has a hole in the frame near each front wheel, and a hole in the
spring hanger near each rear wheel for the jack. Fit the jack into the hole
nearest the flat tire.
5-27
NOTICE:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned
will
damage the vehicleor may allow the vehicle to fall
off the jack.
Be sureto fit the jack lift head into the proper location before
raising your vehicle.
h.
~
Raise the vehicle by
rotating the wheel
wrench to the right.
Raise the vehicle far
enough off the ground
so there is enough
room for the spare tire
to fit.
Remove all the wheel
nuts.
5-28
Take off the flat tire.
Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
surfaces and spare
wheel. Place the spare
on the wheel
mounting surface.
L
5-29
Never use oil or grease on studsor nuts. If you do, the nuts
might cum@loose. Your wheel could falloff, causing a serious
accident.
~~
Put on the spare tire.
Put the nutson by
hand. Make sure the
cone-shaped end is
toward the wheel.
Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.If a nut
can't be turned by hand, use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as soon
as possible.
Lower the vehicle by
rotating the wheel
wrench to the left.
Lower thejack
completely.
si:..
5-30
Tightening Sequence
Tightening Wheel Nut
Use the wrench to tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a criss-cross sequence as
shown. Remove the wheel blocks.
Storing The Jack and Spare Tire
Return the jack,wheel wrench and wheel blocks to the proper locationon
the left wall of your vehicle’s rear area. Secure the items and replace the
jack cover. Put the flat tire in the rear area of your vehicle where the spare
tire was stored.
5-31
If you have a floor-mounted spare tire and it has an aluminum wheel, place
the hook in thefloor ring before placing it through the wheel.
If you have a endgate-mounted spare tire carrier, tighten the nutsto 22-32
ft. lb. (30-40 Nem) torque.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
What you don’t want to do when your vehicle is stuckis to spin your
wheels. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re
stuck, but you must use caution.
I NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle asaswell
the tires.If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your
transmission back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
5-32
Rocking your vehicle to getit out:
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around
your front wheels. Then shift back and forth between “R” (Reverse) and a
forward gear (or with a manual transmission, between First or Second gear
and Reverse), spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries,
you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery hooks, if your
vehicle has them. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
Using the Recovery Hooks
I
If you ever get stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, your vehicle may be
equipped with recovery hooks. The recovery hooks are provided at the front
of your vehicle. You may need to usethem if you’re stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you cancontinue driving.
5-33
8
..... ...
NOTICE:
Never use the recoveryhooks to tow the vehicle. Your vehicle
could be damaged and it would not be covered
by warranty.
5 -34
Service & Appearance Care
Section
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This part
begins with service and fuel information. and then it shows how to check
important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information
about your vehicle. and a section devoted to its appearance care.
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
Engineoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-15
Automatic Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Enginecoolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Brake Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Replacing Brake System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31
Vehiclestorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6-35
Other Maintenance Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6-58
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Capacities and Specifications Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
6-1
Service
Your GM dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it.
We hope you’ll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You’llget
genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts
have one of these marks:
Dohg Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll want to get the
proper GM Service Manual. It tells you much more about how to service
your vehicle than this manualcan. To order the proper service manual, see
“Service Publications” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts andlist the mileage and the
date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the
Index.
NOTICE:
I
If you try to do your own servicework without knowing enough
about it, your vehicle could be damaged.
6-2
Fuel
The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code
letter for your engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of your
instrument panel. (See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.)
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. With the 4.3L
(Code W) engine, use premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or
higher for high power performance, when towinga trailer or with a high
payload requirement. But when operating with a light load as a normal
condition, you may use middlegrade or regular unleaded gasolines.
The gasoline you use should meet specifications ASTM D48 14 in theU.S.
and CGSB 3.5-92 in Canada. These fuels should have the proper additives,
so you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
In the U.S. and Canada, it’s easy to be sure you get the right kind of
gasoline (unleaded). You’ll see “UNLEADED” right on the pump. And only
unleaded nozzles will fit into your vehicle’s filler neck.
Be sure the posted octane is at least9 1 for premium, 89 for middle grade
and 87 for regular. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy
knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your
engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 91 octane or higher and you still hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little
pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of it. It’s the heavy,
constant knock that means you have a problem.
What about gasoline with blending materials thatcontain oxygen
(oxygenates), such as MTBEor alcohol?
MTBE is “methyl tertiary-butyl ether.” Fuel that is no more than 15%
MTBE is fine foryour vehicle.
Ethanol is ethyl orgrain alcohol. Properly-blended fuel that is no more than
10% ethanol is fine for your vehicle.
Methanol is methyl or wood alcohol.
NOTICE:
Fuel that is more than5% methanol is bad for your vehicle.
Don’t use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be
covered under your warranty. And even 5%
at or less, there
must be “cosolvents” and corrosion preventers in this fuel to
help avoid these problems.
6-3
Gasolines for CIeaner Air
Your use of gasoline with deposit control additiveswill help prevent
deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system. That helps keep your
engine in tune and your emission control system working properly. It’s good
for your vehicle, and you’ll be doing your part for cleaner air.
Many gasolines are now blended with oxygenates. General Motors
recommends that you use gasolines with these blending materials, such as
MTBE and ethanol. By doing so, you can help clean the air, especially in
levels.
those parts of the country that have high carbon monoxide
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated
gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. General Motors recommends that you use reformulated gasoline.
By doing so, you can help clean the air, especially in those parts of the
country that have high ozone levels.
You should ask your service station operators if their gasolines contain
deposit control additives and oxygenates, and if they have been
reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the U.S. or Canada,
unleaded fuel may be hard to find. Do not use leaded gasoline. If you use
even one tankful, your emission controls won’t work well or at all. With
continuous use, spark plugs can get fouled, the exhaust system can corrode,
and your engine oil can deteriorate quickly. Your vehicle’s oxygen sensor
will be damaged. All of that means costlyrepairs that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the country where you’ll bedriving.
You can alsowrite us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where
you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
North American Export Sales (NAES)
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario
L l H 8P7
6-4
Filling ‘Your Tank
The fuel capis behind
a hinged door on the
left side of your
vehicle.
To take off the cap, turn it slowly to the left.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as
soon as possible. See “Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right until you hear a clicking
noise.
6-5
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap,
be sure to get the right type.
Your dealer
can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may
fit not
or
have proper venting, and your fuel tank and emissions system
might be damaged.
Checking Things Under theHood
Then go to the front of
the vehicle and release
the secondary hood
release.
6-6
Lift the hood, release
the hood prop fromits
retainer and put the
hood prop into the slot
in the hood.You may
have a light that
comes on when you
lift the hood.
Before closing the
hood, be sure all the
filler capsare on
properly. Then lift the
hood to relieve
pressure on the hood
Prop.
6-7
Remove the hood prop
from the slot in the
hood and return the
prop to its retainer.
Then just pull the
hood down and close
it firmly.
Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to
get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must
be on
level ground.
Turn off the engine
and give theoil a few
minutes to drain back
into the oil pan. If you
don’t, the oildipstick
might not show the
actual level.
I
6-8
To Check EngineOil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it
back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip lower.
When to Add Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need to add some oil. But
you must use the right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.
If your engine hasso much oil that the
oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
6-9
Just fill it enough to
put the level
somewhere in the
proper operating
range. Push the
dipstick all the way
back in when you’re
through.
What Kind of Oil to Use
Beginning midyear 1993, oils of the proper quality for your vehicle will be
identified with this new “starburst” symbol. The “starburst” symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute
(API), and is preferred for use in yourgasoline engine.
You should look for this on the front of the oil container, and use only oils
that display this new symbol.
6-10
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in
the following chart:
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAL VISCOSITY GRADE 011 FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
LOOK FOR
ONE OF THESE
LABELS
HOT
WEATHER
[
- +38
+ 40
-+4
20
- -7
+ 60
f
C
- +27
- +16
- -18
I
COLD
WEATHER
SAE 1OW-30
SAE 5W-30
PREFERRED
IF NEITHER SAE 5W-30 NOR SAE 1OW-30
GRADE OILS ARE AVAILABLE, SAE 30
GRADE MAY BE USED AT TEMPERATURES
ABOVE 40 DEGREES F (4 DEGREES C).
DO NOT USE SAE 1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR
ANY OTHER GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you
can use SAE low-30 if it’s going to be 0°F (-1 8°C) or above. These
numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 1OW-40 or SAE 20W-50.
If you cannot findoils with the new “starburst” symbol on the front of the
container, you should look for and use oils containing the following three
things:
6-11
SHorSG
“SH” or “SG” must be on the oil container,
either by itself or combined
with other quality designations, such as “SH/CD,” “SH, SG, CD,”
“SG/CD,” etc. These letters show American Petroleum Institute (API)
levels of quality.
SAE 5W-30
Energy Conserving I1
Oils with these words on the container will help
you save fuel.
These three things are usually included in a doughnut shaped logo (symbol)
on most containers. If you cannot find oils with the “starburst”symbol, you
should look for oils with the doughnut shaped symbol, containing the three
things noted above.
NOTICE:
If you useoils that do not have either the “starburst” symbol
or
an API SH or SG designation, you can cause engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@oil (in Canada, GM Engine Oil) meets all the
requirements for your vehicle.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your GM dealer is ready to adviseif you
think something should be added.
6-12
When to Change Engine Oil
See if any one of these is true for you:
Most trips are less than 4 miles (6 km).
It’s below freezing outside and most trips are less than 10 miles ( I 6 km).
0
The engine is at low speed most of the time (as in door-to-door
delivery, or in stop-and-go traffic).
You tow a trailer often.
0
Most trips are through dusty places.
0
The vehicle is frequently operated off-road.
If any one of these is true for your vehicle, then you need to change your oil
andfilter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months - whichever comes
first.
If none of them is true, change the oil every 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or
12 months - whichever comes first. Changethe filter at the first oil change
and at every other oil change after that.
Four-wheel Drive Remote Oil Filter
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you will have a remote oil filter
located under the hood. It is mounted to the front left inner fender, behind
the headlights.
Engine Coolant Heater (Engine Block Heater)
An engine coolantheater can be a big help if you have to park outside in
very cold weather, 0°F (-18°C) or colder. If your vehicle has this option,
see “Engine CoolantHeater ” in the Index.
What toDo with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer?Don’t let used oil stay
on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. (Seethe manufacturer’s warnings about the use
and disposal of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil,
be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t
ever disposeof oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, orinto streams orbodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to
a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of
your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
6-13
Air Cleaner
To remove the round air cleaner filter for the 4.3L (VIN Z) engine, turn the
wing nuts to the left. Remove thecover and change the filter. Care should be
taken during reassembly to ensure that the cover is on straight and the
wingnuts are properly tightened.
a
I“
To remove the square air cleaner filter for the 4.3L (VIN W) high
performance engine, loosen both wingnuts (one on the duct and one on the
cover).
Lift the air cleaner assembly up from the vehicle. Open bothclamps and lift
off cover to change the filter. While reassembling the aircleaner assembly,
ensure that the air cleaner cover tabs are fully inserted into the slots in the
air cleaner housing, the two wingscrews are secured, and the PCVair tube is
properly seated in the left hand valve cover.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air
filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services’’ in the Index.
6- 14
NOTICE:
If the air cleaneris off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine
fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which
will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.
Automatic TransmissionFluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the
engine oil is changed. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
when to change your fluid. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the
Index.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this
done at a GM dealership Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could
get a false reading on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission.
Too
much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on
hot engine parts or exhaust system, starting
a fire. Be sure to get
an accurate readingif you check your transmissionfluid.
6-15
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid levelif you
have been driving:
0
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
0
In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating
temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).
To check transmission fluid hot: Get the vehicle warmed upby driving
about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C).
If it’s colder than 50°F (lO”C), drive the vehicle in “D” (3rd Gear) until the
engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for ten minutes.
Then follow the hot check procedures.
To check transmissionfluid cold: A cold check is madeafter the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off and is used only as a
reference. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures
are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (lO”C), you may have to
idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low duringa cold check,
you must perform a hot check before adding fluid. This will give you a
more accurate reading of the fluid level.
To check thefluid hot or cold
0
Park your vehicle on a level place.
0
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in “P’
(Park).
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each
gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then,
position the shift lever in “P” (Park).
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
6-16
Then, without shutting ofSthe engine,follow these steps:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out
again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid
level must be in the COLD area for a cold check or in the HOT area or
cross-hatched area for a hot check.
6-17
4. If the fluid level
is in the
acceptable range,
push the dipstick
back in all the
way; then flip the
handle down to
lock the dipstick
in place.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission
fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’in the Index.
If the fluid level is low, add onlyenough of the proper fluid to bring the
level up tothe COLD area for a cold check or the HOT area for a hot check.
It doesn’t take muchfluid, generally less than a pint. Don’t overfill. We
recommend you use only fluids labeled DEXR0N’-I11 or DEXR0N’-IIE,
because fluids with those labels are made especially for your automatic
transmission. Damage caused by fluids other than DEXRON@-I11or
DEXRON@-IIE is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to
Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all
the way; thenflip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
Manual TransmissionFluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed. However,
the fluid in your manual transmission doesn’t requirechanging.
How fo Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this
done at a GM dealership Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here,or you could
get a false reading.
6- 18
I NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission.
Too
much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and
fall on
hot engine parts or exhaust system, starting
a fire. Be sure to get
an accurate readingif you check your transmission fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on
a level place and the transmission is cool enough for you to rest your fingers
on the transmission case.
Then, follow these steps:
B
1. Remove the filler (upper) plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure it is fully seated. If
the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described in the next steps.
How to Add Fluid
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’ in the
Index.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.
6-19
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch in your vehicleis self-adjusting. A slight amount of
play (114 inch to 1/2 inch) in the pedal is normal.
When to Check and What to Use
A
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how oftenyou should
check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the
proper fluid. See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Index.
How to check
The proper fluid should be addedif the level does not reach the bottom of
the diaphragm when it’s in place in the reservoir. See the instructions on the
reservoir cap.
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the
lubricant and when to change it. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in
the Index.
6-20
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below
the bottom of the filler
plug hole, you’ll need
to add some lubricant.
Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler
plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to
use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Four-Wheel Drive
Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to four-wheel-drive
vehicles. However, they have two additional systems that need lubrication.
TrariSfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the
lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index.
6-21
Wow to Check Lubricant
If the level is below
the bottom of the filler
plug hole, you’ll need
to add some lubricant.
Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler
plug hole.
The arrow on the the left shows the drain plug location.The arrow on the
right shows the filler plug location.
What toUse
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kindof lubricant to
use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the
lubricant and when to change it. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in
the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below
the bottom of the filler
plug hole, you’ll need
to add some lubricant.
f
, .’
@”,
6-22
If the differential is at
operating temperature
(warm), add enough
lubricant to raise the
level to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
If the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1/2 inch
(12 mm) below the filler plug hole.
What to use
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to
use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Engine Coolanr
The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it
is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
The proper coolant for your vehicle will:
0
Give freezing protection down to -20 “F (-29”C), or -34°F (-37°C) in
Canada and for vehicles with the cold climate option.
Give boiling protection up to 258°F (125°C).
0
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
0
Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably distilled) and one-half
antifreeze that meets “GM Specification 6038-M,” which won’t damage
aluminum parts. You can use a recycled coolant conforming to “GM
Specification 6038-M,” with a complete coolant flush and refill. If youuse
this mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.
6-23
I NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolantmix, your engine could overheat
and be badly damaged. The repair
cost wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Too much water in themix can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Some conditions, such as air trapped in the cooling system, can affect the
coolant level in the radiator. Check the coolant level when the
engine is cold
and follow the steps under “Adding Coolant”for the proper way to add
coolant.
If you have to add coolant more thanfour times a year, have your dealer
check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant,you don’t have toadd extra
inhibitors or additiveswhich claim to improve the system. These
can be harmful.
Adding Coolant
To Check Coolant
When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at“ADD,” or a little
higher. When your engine is warm, the level should beup to “FULL HOT,”
or a little higher.
To Add Coolant
If you need more
coolant, add the
proper mix at the
coolant recovery tank.
6-24
Add coolant mix at the recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.
Radiator Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
Your radiator cap isa 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and
must be tightly installed to prevent coolantloss and possible
engine damage from overheating.Be sure the arrowson the cap
line up with the overflow tubeon the radiatorfiller neck.
When you replace
your radiator pressure
cap, an A P cap is
recommended. See
“Service Replacement
Part and Filter
Recommendations” in
the Index.
6-25
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine
coolant system. The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the
radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature.
When you replace your thermostat, an AC@thermostat is recommended.
Power Steering Fluid
NOTICE:
Always turn the engine
off before checking or adding power
steering fluid. The power steering cap
is close to the fan and
other moving parts.
Unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstick with
a clean rag. Replace
the cap and
completely tighten it.
P
Then remove the cap
again and look at the
fluid level on the
dipstick.
i
0
When the engine compartment is hot, the level should be at the “HOT”
mark.
6-26
0
When the engine compartment is cool, the level should be at the
“FULL COLD” mark.
What to Add
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
NOTICE:
When adding power steering fluid or making a complete fluid
change, always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
To Add
Open the cap labeled
“WASHER FLUID
ONLY.” Add washer
fluid until the bottle is
full.
NOTICE:
0
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
0
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid, Water can
cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid
tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water
doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid.
0
Fill your washer fluid tank only 3/4 full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion, which coulddamage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use radiator antifreeze in your windshield washer.It
can damage your washer system and paint,
6-27
Brakes
Brake Master Cylinder
Your brake master
cylinder is here. Itis
filled with DOT-3
brake fluid.
There areonly two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in your master cylinder
might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an
acceptable
the
level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leakingout of the
brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,or won’t work at
all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid
won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when yourlinings are worn, then
you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake
hydraulic system.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake
fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in the Index.
6-28
To Check BrakeFluid
You can check the
brake fluid without
taking off the cap. Just
look at thewindows
on the brake fluid
reservoir.
The fluid levels should be above“MIN.” If they aren’t, have your brake
system checkedto see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the
levels are
above “MIN” and below the top of each window.
What toAdd
When you do need brake fluid,use only DOT-3 brake fluid - such as
Delco SupremeII@(GM Part No.1052535). Use new brake fluid from a
sealed containeronly, and always clean the brakefluid reservoir capbefore
removing it.
NOTICE:
0
Don’t let someoneput in the wrong kind of fluid. For
example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they’ll have to be replaced.
0
Brake fluid can damage paint, so be careful not to spillbrake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, washit off immediately. See
“Appearance Care” in the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brakepads are worn and new pads are needed. The
sound may come and go orbe heard all the time your vehicle is moving
(except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
6-29
I NOTICE:
I
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in
costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal whenthe
brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, butif you ever hear a
rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspected.Also, the
rear brake drums should be removed and inspectedeach time the tiresare
removed for rotation or changing. When you have the front brakes replaced,
have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height, or if
there is a rapid increase in pedal travel.This could be a sign of brake
trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes adjust for wear.
If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal,your rear drum brakes
may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying
the
brakes a few times.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a modern vehicle is complex. Its many partshave to
be of topquality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Vehicles we design andtest have top-quality GM brake parts in
them, as your vehicle does when it is new. When youreplace parts of your
braking system - for example, when your brakelinings wear down and
6-30
you have to have new ones put in -be sure you get new genuine GM
replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change, for the
worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Fluid Leak Check
After the vehicle has been parked for a while, inspect the surface under the
vehicle for water, oil, fuel orother fluids. Water dripping from the air
conditioning system after it has been used is normal. If you notice fuel leaks
or fumes, the causes should be found and corrected at once.
Battery
Every new vehicle has a Delco Freedom@battery. You never have to add
water to one of these. When it’s time for a new battery, we recommend a
Delco Freedom@battery. Get onethat has the catalog number shown on the
original battery’s label.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, take off the
black, negative (-) cable fromthe battery. This will help keep your battery
from running down.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage
periods.
For more information, contact your dealer’s service department, or write:
Adistra Corporation
171 Hamilton Street
Plymouth, MI 48 170
In Canada, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Services Department
Oshawa, Ontario L1J 5Z6 Canada
6-31
ulb Replacement
Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lights areoff and the
engine isn't running.
Halogen Bulbs
Headlights
1. Remove the four
screws from the
headlight retainer.
2. Pull the headlight
out and remove
the retainer.
3. Unplug the
headlight.
4. Plug in the new
bulb and put it in
place.
:::
5. Install the
retainer to the
headlight.
c
6. Install the screws.
6-32
Front ParkingKurn Signal Lights
1. Reach under and behind the parkingkurn signal light assembly.
2. Turn the socket to
the left and pull it
out.
3. Turn the bulb to
the left and pull it
out of the socket.
4. Put the new bulb in the socket and turn it to the right until it is tight.
5. Put the socket back into the assembly and turn the socket to the right
until it locks in place.
6-33
Rear Lights
1. Open the endgate.
-
3. Pull the assembly
away from the
fender.
4. Turn tne socket to
the left to remove
it. If the socket
has a tab, push
the tab in while
you turn the
socket.
5. Turn the bulb to the left to remove it.
6 . Put the new bulb into the socket and turn the bulb to the right.
7. Put the socket into the light assembly and turnthe socket to the right
until it locks in place.
8. Install the light assembly and screws.
9. Close the endgate.
6-34
Other Maintenance Items
Front Suspension and Steering Linkage
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to lubricate the
fittings and what type of lubricant to use.
Front Wheel Bearing(Two- Wheel Drive)
If your vehicle is two-wheel drive, it has wheel bearings that must be
cleaned and repacked.
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often this must be
done.
Single Belt Accessory Drive
Your new vehicle uses a serpentinebelt that is lighter, and more durable
than systems with several belts.
The belt runs over or around the pulleyson the engine. A tensioneris used
to keep the belt tight at all times. 'The tensioner also makes replacing the
belt easier. If you need to replace the belt, be sure to get thecorrect
replacement belt. Your dealership orparts supplier can helpyou with this.
The Accessory Drive Belt Routing label on your vehicle will show you how
to route the belt your vehicle uses.
6-35
Windshield Wiper Blade Inserts
To replace your
windshield wiper
blade inserts, lift the
wiper arm away from
the windshield. Pinch
the two tabs on the
wiper arm and slide
the insert out of the
blade. Slide the new
one in place. Make
sure the tabs are
locked into position.
Air Conditioning
Every now and then have your dealership check your air conditioning
system to be sure it has not lost any cooling ability. If you think the system
is not working properly, have your dealership check it out as soon as
possible.
The air conditioning will not work when the temperature
is below 40°F
(4°C).
Lubrication
Accelerator Control System
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often the accelerator
linkage pivot points must be lubricated and what type of lubricant to use.
Accelerator cables and cruise control cables should not be lubricated. Any
cables that are worn or are hard to pull should be replaced.
When cleaning the engine compartment with water or steam, avoid directing
the flow onto the throttle linkage in a manner that would cause moisture to
enter the cables.
Hood Latches and Hood Hinge
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how to lubricate the hood
latch and hood hinge assembly.
6-36
Propeller Shaft Slip Splines/Universal Joints
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule todetermine how often the slip and
universal joints mustbe lubricated and what type oflubricant to use.
Body
Normal use of your vehicle will cause metal to metal wear at some points on
the cab and body if they are not lubricated.
For exposed surfaces, such as door checks, door lock bolts, lock striker plate
dovetail bumper wedges, etc.,a thin film of engine oil should be applied.
Where oil holes are provided in the body or cab, a dripless oil can be used.
The seat adjusters and seat track should be lubricated with chassis grease.
Door weatherstrips and rubber hood bumpers should be wiped clean witha
wet cloth and lightly coated with a rubber lubricant.
Never use too much of any lubricant and besure to wipe up anyextra
lubricant when you are finished.
Window regulators and controls are inside the doors. They are lubricated
with a long lasting grease. If lubrication is required your dealer should
perform this service.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to lubricate
these items and what type oflubricant to use.
Lock Cylinders
To be sure your locks operate properly, they must be lubricated.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to lubricate them
and what type of lubricant to use.
You should not use penetrating oils because they could wash out the factory
installed lubricant and cause the lock to bind. De-icers which contain
alcohol could also wash away the lubricant, so be sure to lubricate the lock
after using a de-icer of this type.
Endgate Handle
The endgate handle pivot points on your vehicle should be lubricated to
keep the handle working smoothly.
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule to determine how often to lubricate them
and what type of lubricant to use.
6-37
Exhaust System
‘Tohelp prevent damage to your exhaust system, do not continue to drive
your vehicle if you notice:
Engine misfiring
Loss of performance
0
Other unusual operating conditions
Have your engine and exhaust system serviced regularly.
Three- WayCatalytic Converter
Your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converter is designed to reduce the
pollutants in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use only unleaded fuel in your vehicle.
If you use leaded fuel, you could damage your three-way catalytic converter
and other engine components.
Engine Control Module System
This system has an oxygen (02) sensor that helps keep your engine’s
air-fuel mixture at a proper level. Use onlyunleaded fuel in your vehicle. If
you use leaded fuel, you could damage your oxygen (02) sensor and affect
your vehicle’s emissions.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (SERVICE ENGINE SOON
)
This light on your instrument panel lets you know when your emission
system needs service. The light will come on briefly when you start your
engine to let you know thatthe system is working. If it does not come on
when you start your engine, or if it comes on and stays on while you’re
driving, your system may need service. Your vehicle should still be
driveable, but you should have your system serviced right away.
6-38
Loading Your Vehicle
The CertificatiodTirelabel is found on the driver’s door lock pillar. The
label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed
to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
The Certificationnirelabel also tells you the maximum weights for the
front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To findout
the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure
to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not
change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle
the right way.
6-39
I NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover partsor components thatfail
because of overloading.
If you put things inside yourvehicle - like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
Payload
The Payload Capacity is shownon the Certificationmire label. This is the
maximum load capacity thatyour vehicle can carry.Be sure to include the
weight of the people inside as part of your load. If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle left the factory, remember to
subtract the weight of these things from the payload. Your dealer can help
you with this.
6-40
I
Trailering Package
If your vehicle comes with the Trailering Package, there is also a load rating
which includes the weight of the vehicle and the trailer it tows. This rating
is called the Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR).
When you weigh your trailer, be sure to include the weight of everything
you put in it. And, remember to figure the weight of the people inside as
part of your load.
Your dealer can help you determine your GCWR.
Add-on Equipment
W1. I you carry removable items, you may need to put a limit on how many
people you carry inside your vehicle. Be sureto weigh your vehicle before
you buy and install the new equipment.
NOTICE:
Your warranty doesn’t cover partsor components that fail
because of overloading.
6-41
Tires
We don’t make tires. Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made
by a leading tire manufacturer. These tires are warranted by the tire
manufacturers and their warranties are delivered with every new vehicle. If
your spare tire is a different brand than your road tires, you will have a tire
warranty folder from each of these manufacturers.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
The Certificatioflirelabel which is on the driver’s door lock pillar, shows
the correct inflation pressures for your tires, when they’re cold. “Cold”
means your vehicle has been sitting for atleast three hours or driven no
more than a mile.
6-42
NOTICE:
Don’t letanyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is
all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough air
(underinflation) you can get:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
If your tires have toomuch air (overinflation), youcan get:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. Simply looking
at the tires will not tell you the pressure, especially if you have radial tires
- which may look properly inflated even if they’re underinflated.
If your tires have valve caps, be sure to put them back on. Theyhelp prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
6-43
Tire Inspectionand Rotation
To make your tires last longer, have them inspected and rotated at the
mileages recommended in the Maintenance Schedule. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services’’ in the Index.
Use this rotation
FRT
FRT
pattern.
U
If your vehicle has front tires with different load ratingsor tread designs
(such as all season vs. on/off road) than the reartires, don’t rotate your tires
front to rear.
After the tires have been rotated,adjust the front and rear inflation pressure
as shown on the CertificationEire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
6-44
When lt’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when
it’s time for new tires
is to check the
treadwear indicators,
which will appear
when your tires have
only 2/32 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
You need a new tire if
0
You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show
cord or fabric.
0
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that can’t be repaired well
because of the size or location of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the
CertificatiodTire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance
Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you
get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Specnumber. That way, your
vehicle will continue tohave tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during
normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by a “MS” (for mud and snow).
6-45
If you ever replace your tires with thosenot having a TPC Specnumber,
make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction
type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system developed by the United
States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires
by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States.)
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rateof the
tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test
course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantlyfrom the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and
climate.
-
Traction A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are: A, B, and C. They represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A
tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight-ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning)
traction.
6-46
Temperature - A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passengercar
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established fora tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or
excessive loading,either separately orin combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
These grades aremolded on the sidewallsof passenger car tires.
While thetires available as standard or optionalequipment on General
Motors vehicles may vary with respect to these grades, all such tires meet
General Motors performance standardsand have been approved for use on
General Motors vehicles. All passenger type (P Metric) tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or
the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be
rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked orbadly rusted. If wheel nuts keep
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If
the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminumwheels, which can
sometimes be repaired). Seeyour GM dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity, diameter,
width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
6-47
If you need toreplace any of your wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts,
replace them only with parts. This way, you will besure to have the right
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for your GM model.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life,
brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, headlight aim,
bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Used Replacement Wheels
6-48
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P235/75R15 size tires, don’t use tire chains;
they can damage yourvehicle.
If you have othersize tires, use tire chainsonly where legal and
only when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains that
are the propersize for your tires. Install them on the drive axle
tires (four-wheel-drive vehicles can use chains on both axles)
and tighten themas tightly aspossible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chain manufacturer’s
vehicle,
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your
If the contact continues,slow down
stop and retighten them.
until it stops. Driving too fast with chainswill
on damage your
vehicle.
Appearance Care
t
1
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can
burst into flameif you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some aredangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to
follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your
doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
6-49
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
Gasoline
0
0
Paint Thinner
Benzene
0
Turpentine
Naphtha
0
Lacquer Thinner
Carbon Tetrachloride
0
Nail Polish Remover
Acetone
They can all be hazardous - some more th. a n 0th.ers - and they can all
damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these
will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get ridof dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or
leather with a clean, damp cloth.
Your GM dealer has two GM cleaners, a solvent-type spot lifter and a
foam-type powdered cleaner. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. Do not use them on vinyl or leather.
Here are some cleaning tips:
0
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
0
Clean up stains as soon as you can - before they set.
0
Use a cleancloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft
brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
0
Use solvent-type cleaners in a well-ventilated area only. If you use
them, don’t saturate the stained area.
0
If a ringforms after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or
it will set.
6-50
Using Foam-Type Cleaner on Fabric
Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim
along stitch or welt lines.
Mix Multi-Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the directions on the
container label.
Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
Don’t saturate the material.
Don’t rub it roughly.
As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the
suds.
0
Rinse the section with a clean, wet sponge.
0
Wipe off what’s left with aslightly damp paper towel or cloth.
0
Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer or a heat lamp.
NOTICE:
Be careful witha hair dryer or heat lamp.
You could scorch the
fabric.
0
Wipe with a clean cloth.
Using Solvent-Type Cleaner on Fabric
First, see if you have to use solvent-type cleaner at all. Some spots and
stains will clean off better with just water and mild soap.
If you need to use a solvent:
Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with a clean, dull knife
or scraper. Use very little cleaner, light pressure and clean cloths
(preferably cheesecloth). Cleaning should start at the outside of the
stain, “feathering” toward the center. Keep changing to a clean section
of the cloth.
When you clean a stain from fabric, immediately dry the area with an
air hose, hair dryer, or heat lamp to help prevent a cleaning ring. (See
the previous NOTICE.)
6-51
Special Cleaning Problems
Greasy or Oily Stains
Such as grease, oil, butter, margarine, shoe polish, coffee with cream,
chewing gum, cosmetic creams, vegetable oils, wax crayon, tar and asphalt.
Carefully scrape off excess stain.
Follow the solvent-type instructions described earlier.
0
Sh% polish, wax crayon, tar and asphalt will stain ifleft on a vehicle
seat fabric. They should be removed as soon as possible. Be careful,
because the cleaner will dissolve them and maycause them to spread.
Non-Greasy Stains
Such as catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, wine,
vomit, urine and blood.
Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool
water.
If a stain remains, follow the foam-type instructions described earlier.
If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
waterhaking soda solution: I teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup
(250 ml) of lukewarm water.
If needed, clean lightly with solvent-type cleaner.
Combination Stains
Such as candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains.
0 Carefully scrape off excess stain, then clean with cool water and allow
to dry.
0
If a stain remains, clean it with solvent-type cleaner.
Cleaning Viny/
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it
more than once.
0
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them
off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a solvent-type vinyl cleaner.
4-52
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddlesoap.
0
For stubborn stains, use a mild solution of 10% isopropyl alcohol
(rubbing alcohol)and 90% water.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture
polish or shoepolish on leather.
Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work
into finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument
panel. Sprays containingsilicones or waxes may cause annoyingreflections
in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Glass
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner(GM Part No. 1050427)
or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and
dust films.
Don’t use abrasive cleanerson glass, because they may cause scratches.
Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be
scraped off later. If abrasive cleanersare used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger elementmay be damaged. Any temporary
license should not be attached across the defogger grid.
6-53
Cleaning the Outsideof the Windshield,
Backglass and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is notclear after using the windshield washer, or if the
wiper blade chatters when running, waxor other material may be on the
blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield withGM Windshield Cleaner, Bon-Ami
Powder@(GM Part No. 1050011). The windshield is clean if beads do not
form when you rinse it with water.
Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Wiper blades should bechecked on a regular basis and replaced when worn.
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depthof color, gloss
retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish isto keep it clean by washing
it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Don’t use strong
soaps
or chemical detergents. Use liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild
detergent) soaps. Don’t use cleaning agents that contain acidor abrasives.
All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly andnot allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or
a 100%cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure vehicle washes maycause water to enter your vehicle.
Finish Care
Occasional waxingor mild polishingof your vehicle may be necessaryto
remove residue from the paint finish.
You can get GM approved cleaning
products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”in the
Index.)
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularlyto keep their luster. Washing
with water is all that is usually needed. However, you may useGM Chrome
Polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
6-54
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protective trim,
never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright
metal parts.
Aluminum Wheels
Aluminum wheels have a protective coating similar to the painted surface of
your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, chrome polish, abrasive
cleaners or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage
this coating. After rinsing thoroughly, a wax maybe applied.
I NOTICE:
If you have aluminum wheels, don’t use
an automatic vehicle
wash that has hard silicon carbide cleaning brushes. These
brushes can takeoff the protective coating.
White Sidewa// Tires
Your GM dealer has a GM White Sidewall Tire Cleaner. You can use a stiff
brush with the cleaner.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and
not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a cleancloth at least every
six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may
be required. (See “Recommended Fluids & Lubricants” in the Index.)
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement,
make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Foreign Material
Calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, and other foreign
matter can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces.
Use cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
4
6-55
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should be repaired
right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materialsavailable
from your dealer or other service outlets. Largerareas of finish damage can
be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect
on
the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can
occur on the underbody parts suchas fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain
water. Clean any areas where mud and otherdebris can collect. Dirt packed
in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer or an underbody vehicle washing system cando this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout.
Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack paintedsurfaces on your
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etchedinto the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paintjob causes this, GM will repair, at no charge
to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damagedby this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever
comes first.
6-56
PART
NUMBER
1050172
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
USAGE
16 oz. (0.473L) Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes old
waxes, polishes, tar
and road oil
1050173
16 oz. (0.4731)ChromeCleaner
and Polish
1050174
16 oz. (0.473L) White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
32 oz. (0.946L) Vinyl Leather
Cleaner
Removes rust and
corrosion on
chrome and
stainless steel
Cleans white and
black tires
Spot and stain
removal on leather
or vinyl
1050214
1050244
16 oz. (0.473L) FabricCleaner
Spot and stain
removal on cloth
and fabric
1050427
23 oz. (0.680L) GlassCleaner
Glass cleaningand
spot cleaningon
vinyls
1050429
6 lbs. (2.72 kg) Multi-Purpose
Powder Cleaner
1050729
105
1055
105 1398
1052870
1050201
Cleans vinyl and
cloth on door trim,
seats, and
carpet-also tires
and mats
8 02. (0.237L) Vinyl Top CleanerCleaning
of vinyl
tops
16 oz. (0.473L)
Preservatone
Vinyl top dressing
8 oz. (0.237L)Spot
Lifter
Spot and stain
removal on cloth
and fabric
16 oz. (0.473L) Wash-Wax (conc.)
16 oz. (0.473L) Magic Mirror
Cleaner-Polish
and
6-57
Exterior wash
Exterior cleaner
polish
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front
corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you
look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
6-58
Engine Identification
The eighth characterin your VIN is the engine code. This code
will help
rou identify your engine, specifications, and replace-?nt parts.
i
on
6-59
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box.
WHEELBASE
1? Service Parts Identification
<
VEHICLE
IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
0000000000000oO00
I
DO NOT REMOVE
’OOOOO
i
00000
II
ARL AD2 A65 B6Y B9A B9K C60 D1B D36 E52 E6E E92 FLT GU1 JM7
K19 K64 LC3 MX1 M31 NA5 NB1 QMXVK3 VC2 VYIVY4V73Y19
6BJ 62L 62U
67D
671
679
I
MODEL DESIGNATION
OPTlON CONTENT
ZJ7
7BJ 8HJ 9HJ
I
1
PAINTTECHNOLOGY
ORDER NUMBER
EXTERIORCOLORS
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
0
your VIN,
the model designation,
0
paint information, and
0
a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be surethat this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Add-on Lxtrical Equipment
-
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical
to your vehicle unless you check
with your dealer first. ,Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from workingas they should.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses, circuit breakers, and fusible thermal links in the
wiring itself. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical
problems.
6-60
Headlights
The headlightwiring is protected by a circuit breaker in the lightswitch. An
electrical overload will cause the lights to go on and off. If this happens,
have your headlight wiring checked rightaway.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If
the motor overheats dueto heavy snow,etc., the wiper will stop until the
motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not
snow, etc., besure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fusepanel protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker
opens and closes, protecting thecircuit until the problem is fixed.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The optionalseven-wire trailer wiring harness is protected by an in-line
fuse in the battery feed wire. This fuseis near the junction block. See
“Trailer Wiring Harness” in the Features & Controls section.
Fuse Block
The fuseblock is in
the instrumentpanel
on the driver’s side.
Remove the cover
with a screwdriverand
then you can remove
fuses with a fuse
extractor.
6-61
Be sure to use the
correct fuse.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have spare
a
fuse, you can
“borrow” one of the correct value. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without-like the radio or cigarette lighter-and use
its fuse, if it is of the value you need. Replace it as soon as you can. See
“Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in this section.
Capacities and Specification Charts
Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest
information available at the time of printing, and are subject to change. If a
part listed in this manual isnot the same as the part usedin your vehicle
when it was built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM
truck dealer.
Engine Identification
4.3L
V6
4.3L
V6
w
Fuel System
Z
TBP
CPI**
Produced By
Emissions
U.S.
L.D.
U.S.
L.D.
Engine Description
Type
VIN Code
*Throttle Body Fuel Injection
**Central Port Fuel Injection
6-62
Wheel NutTorque
DESCRIPTION
Base orOptional Wheel
TORQUE
95 ft. lbs.(130 Nom)
Cooling System Capacity
VIN CODE
ENGINE
4.3L
4.3L
QUANTITY*
12.1 Quarts (1 1.5 Liters)
12.1 Quarts (1 1.5 Liters)
Z
W
*All quantities are approximate. Afterrefill, the level MUST be checked.
Crankcase Capacity
ENGINE
4.3L
VIN
CODE
Z
4.3L
w
QUANTITY*
Without Filter
QUANTITY*
With Filter
4 Quarts (3.8 Liters)
4 Quarts (3.8 Liters)
4.5 Quarts (4.3 Liters)
4.5 Quarts (4.3 Liters)
*All quantities are approximate.After refill, the level MUST be checked.
Do not overfill.
Fuel Tank Capacity
TYPE
Standard Tank
QUANTITY*
20 Gallons (76 Liters)
*All quantities are approximate.
Lamp and Bulb Data
EXTERIOR LAMPS
Headlamps (Halogen)
Backup Lamp
License Lamp
Tail and Stop Lamps
Marker Lamp (Front)
Marker Lamp (Rear)
Parking and Signal Lamp
CHMSL Assembly
QUANTITY
2
2
1
1 Unit
6-63
TRADE NO.
H6054
1156
67
2057
194
194
2057
See GM Dealer
INTERIOR LAMPS
Ash Tray Lamp
Courtesy Lamp
Dome Lamp
Dome Lamp (Rear)
Four-wheel Drive Indicator
Heater & AC Control
Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp
Overhead Console
161
1003
21 1-2
561
161
37
1003
Dome Lamp(Front)
Reading Lamps
Rearview Mirror Lamps
Sunshade Vanity Mirror Lamps
Underhood Lamp
211-2
194
2 12-2
7065
93
Instrument Cluster Lamps
NOTE: A PC part number indicates that the bulb and base are one
assembly and must be replaced
as such.
PC74
Anti-lock Brake Warning Indicator?
(Utility Models)
Anti-lock Brake Warning Indicator$
(Utility Models)
Brake System Warning Indicator?
1
PC 194
1
PC74
Brake System Warning Indicator$
1
PC 194
Check Gages Indicator?
1
PC74
Daytime Running Lights Indicator’f
Daytime Running Lights Indicator$
1
PC74
I
Charging System Indicator?
1
High Beam Indicator?
High Beam Indicator$
1
PC 194
PC74
PC74
PC 194
PC168
PC74
Instrument Cluster Illumination?
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service
Engine Soon)?
6-64
1
6
1
INTERIOR LAMPS (continued)
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service
Engine Soon)$
1
PC 194
Seat Belt Indicator?, $
PC 194
Shift Indicator (PRNDL)$
PC 194
Tachometer Warning Band$
PC 194
PC74
PC74
PC 194
Turn Signal Indicator?
Upshift Indicator?
Upshift Indicator$
?With Standard Cluster
$With Digital Cluster
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
A U X PWR
OUTLET
0 1
1
TCCM
CD PLAYER/RADIO
DRL
Fuse Legend
0
10 Amp - Red
0
15 Amp - Blue
0
20 Amp - Yellow
0
25 Amp - Clear
0
30 Amp - Green
6-66
NAME
CIRCUITS PROTECTED
FUSE
5 Amp
INST LPS
Instrument Panel Lights,
Headlight Warning Buzzer,
Rear Defogger Switch Light,
Four-wheel Drive Indicator
Light, RR Wiper Switch
Lamp, Fog Lamp Switch
Light, Electronic Shift Pnl
Lamps
PWR ACC
Power Door Locks, Rear
Defogger, Electric Shift
Transfer Case, Power Seat
HORN-DM
BATT
Horn, Dome Lights, Courtesy 20 Amp
Lights, Fog Lamp Relay,
Outside Rearview Mirror,
Liftgate Release Solenoid,
ISRV & Lighted Vanity
Mirror, IP Compr Lamps, Cig
Lighter
Indicator Lights and Gages,
20 Amp
Rear Defogger Relay, Cruise
Control, Four Wheel Drive
Indicator Light, Rear
Defogger Timer, Seat Belt
Timer, 0 2 Sensor, VTC Relay,
Auto Trans, RR Defog
Switch, 0 Spd Warning
(Export), DRL Relay, ISRV
and Vanity
IGN-GAGES
30 Amp
STOP-HAZ
Stop Lights, Hazard Flasher
Warning Lights, Chime
Module
15 Amp
TAIL LMPS
Light Switch, Tailpark
Lights, Digital Cluster,
License Lamp
20 Amp
TURN-B/U
Turn Signals & Backup Lights
15 Amp
25 Amp
15 Amp
HEATER A/C Heating and Air Conditioning
RADIO
ECM B
Radio, Rear Wiper, Rear
Washer
Engine Control Module, Fuel
Pump
6-67
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
15 Amp
NAME
ECM I
Engine Control Module
PWR
WINDOW
WIPER
Power Windows
BRAKE
DRL
TRAILER*
CD
PLAYER**
TCCM
AUX PWR**
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
CIRCUITS
PROTECTED
FUSE
10 Amp
30 Amp
Windshield
Wipers
and
Washers
Four-wheel Anti-lock Brake
Module, Digital Ratio Adapter
Module, Speedometer, Auto
Transmission Converter
Clutch
Daytime Running Light
(Canada Only)
Trailer Wiring Harness
25 Amp
CD PlayedRadio
10 Amp
Electric Shift Transfer Case
Module
Aux.Pwr. Outlet
5 Amp
15 Amp
10 Amp
30 Amp
10 Amp
*In-line fuse
**Fuse is attached to fuse block.
Service Replacement Part and Filter
Recommendafons
ENGINE (VIN)
OIL FILTER
AIR CLEANER
FILTER
PCV VALVE
SPARK PLUGS
FUEL FILTER
RADIATOR CAP
4.3L (2)
PF52
A773C
4.3L(W)
PF52
A1163C
CV789C
cv774c
.CR43TSM
GF48 1
RC36
.CR43TSM
*Use copper-cored resistor type sparkplugs.
6-68
GF48 1
RC36
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioningrefrigerants are the same. If the air conditioning
system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is
used. If you’re not sure, ask your GM dealer. For additional information, see
your “Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”booklet.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacity
TYPE
R-12
SYSTEM
C-60
*All Quantities Are Approximate
6-69
QUANTITY*
2.50 lbs. (1.134 kg)
Notes
6-70
Scheduled Maintenance Services
Section
This section covers the maintenancerequired for your vehicle. Your vehicle
needs these services to retain its safety. dependability. and emission control
performance.
A Word About Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment .............................
7-2
Scheduled Maintenance Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Selecting The Proper Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance Schedule I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Maintenance Schedule I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
At Least Once aMonth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
At Least Once a Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-12
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Fluids & Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7-17
Service Station Checks .....................................
~
protection
Plan
Have you purchased theGM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements
your new vehicle warrantiesSee your Vehicle dealer for details
.
.
7-1
A Word About Maintenance
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive
very short distances only a few times a week. Or you maydrive long
distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their GM vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. You may even need more frequent checks and replacements than
you will find in the schedules in this section. So please read this section and
note how you drive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle
in good condition, see your GM dealer, the placemany GM owners choose
to have their maintenance work done. Your dealer can be relied upon to use
proper parts and practices.
Your Vehicle And The Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps keep your vehicle in good
working condition, but it also helps the environment.All recommended
maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance or the
removal of important components can significantly affect the quality of the
air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or even the wrong tire inflation can
increase thelevel of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to help keep your vehicle in good condition, please
maintain your vehicle properly.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will
probably want to get the service information GM publishes. You will find a
list of publications and how to get them in Section 8, Customer Assistance
Information. See “Service Publications” in the Index.
The Maintenance Record provides a place for you to record the maintenance
performed on your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write itdown in this section. This will help you determine when your
next maintenance should be done. In addition, it is a good idea to keep your
maintenance receipts. They may be neededto qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
7-2
This part tells you the maintenanceservices you should have done and when
you should schedule them. Your GM dealer knows your vehicle best and
wants you to be happy with it. If you go to your dealer forall your service
needs, you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
These schedulesare for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within the recommended limits. You will
find these limits on your vehicle’s Certification Label. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
are driven on regular road surfaces, and within legal driving limits, as
described in Section 4, Your Driving and the Road.
are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See “Off Road
Driving With Your Four-wheel Drive Vehicle” in the Index.
use the proper fuel. See “Fuel”in the Index.
Selecting The Proper Maintenance Schedule
Your driving conditionsand how you use your vehicle will help you
determine which schedule to use. The schedulesare found later in this
section.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEI
Is any one of these true for your vehicle?
Most trips are less than 4 miles (6 kilometers).
Most trips are less than 10 miles ( 1 6 kilometers) and the outside
temperatures are below freezing.
The engine is at low speed most of the time (as in stop-and-go traffic,
door-to-door delivery, or other commercial uses).
You operate in dusty areas or off-road frequently.
You tow a trailer.
If any one (or more) of these is true for your driving, follow ScheduleI. The
chart for ScheduleI has plus signs (+).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEI1
Follow Schedule I1 ONLY if none of the above conditions are true. The
chart for ScheduleI1 has dots ( 0 ) .
7-3
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE I
* An Emission Control Service
** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index
$ The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the
completion of vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended
maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be
recorded.
T0801TT1101
7-4
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (continued)
I
THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHARTUP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE
DONE AFTER 60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS.
T0802R1102
7-5
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE/ I
llf your driving conditions meet tho: 3 specified in “Scheduled Maintc lance Services” in
Item
Ithis Section (or see Index), useM; lntenance Schedule II ( 0 )
Service
Miles (000)
Oil Filter Change*-Every
12 Months, or
3CoolingSystemService*
-Every 24 Months or
4 Air Cleaner Filter Replacement*
5FrontWheelBearingRepack
(2WD Only)
6 TransmissionService **
7 FuelFilterReplacement*$
8 SparkPlugReplacement*
9 SparkPlugWireInspection*
10EngineTimingCheck*$(Some
Models)
11FuelTank,CapandLines
Inspection*$
II
12 EngineAccessoryDriveBelt
Inspection*
13 Tire and Wheel Rotation
I
14 Drive Axle Service
15 I Brake Systems Inspection**
* An Emission Control service
** See “Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index
$ The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure
to perform this
or limit recall liability priorto the
maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty
completion of vehicle useful life. General Motors, however, urges that all recommended
maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be
recorded.
THE SERVICES SHOWN ON THIS CHART UP TO 60,000 MILES (100 000 km) ARE TO BE
DONE AFTER 60,000 MILES AT THE SAME INTERVALS.
T0803/Tl103
7-6
Explanation Of Scheduled Maintenance Services
Below are explanations of the services listed in the maintenance charts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in this section. Make sure
whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and
all necessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle.
1. ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER CHANGE*
- ALWAYS USE
API SERVICE SH OR SG ENERGY CONSERVING I1 OILS OF THE
PROPER VISCOSITY. The “SH” or “SG” designation may be shown
alone orin combination with others, such as “SHKD”, or“SH, SG,
CD,” or “SG/CD”, etc. To determine the preferred viscosity oil for your
vehicle’s engine (e.g. SAE 5W-30), see “Engine Oil” in the Index.
2. CHASSIS LUBRICATION- Lubricate the front suspension, ball
joint, steering linkage, and transfer case shift linkage, parking brake
cable guides, propshaft splines, universal joints, brake pedal springs,
and clutch pedal springs at the intervals specified on the proper
maintenance schedule, or at every engine oil change, whichever comes
first.
Ball joints should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10°F
(-12°C) or higher. When the weather is cold, let them warm up before
lubricating them or they could be damaged.
Also, be sure tocheck all the vehicle fluid levels at this time.
3. COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE*- Drain, flush and refill the
system with new or approved recycled coolant conforming to “GM
Specification 603%”’. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for the
proper coolant and mixture to use in your vehicle.
Also inspect the hoses and replace them if they are cracked, swollen, or
deteriorated. Clean the outside of the radiator and airconditioning
condenser. Wash theradiator neck. To ensure proper operation,
pressure test the radiator and cap.
-Replace at
4. AIR CLEANER FILTER REPLACEMENT”
specified intervals. Ask your dealer for the proper replacement
intervals for your driving conditions.
5. FRONT WHEEL BEARING REPACK (2-WHEEL DRIVE
ONLY) - Clean and repack thefront wheel bearings at each brake
relining, or at the specified interval, whichever comes first.
*An Emission Control Service
7-7
6. TRANSMISSION SERVICE:
Automatic Transmission- Change the transmission fluid and filter
every 15,000 miles (25 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under
one ormore of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic.
Where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32”C) or
higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Frequent trailer pulling.
0
Uses such as taxi, police, delivery or other commercial service.
If the vehicle is not used mainlyunder any of these conditions, change
the fluid and filter every 30,000 miles (50 000 km). See “Automatic
Transmission Fluid” in the Index for more information.
Manual Transmission- Transmission fluid does not require periodic
changing.
7. FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT*$- Replace the fuel filter at the
specified interval or sooner if clogged.
8. SPARK PLUG REPLACEMENT*-Replace spark plugs with the
type listed in Section 6. See “SpecificationCharts” in the Index.
9. SPARK PLUG WIRE INSPECTION*-Clean wires and inspect
for burns, cracks or otherdamage. Check the wire boot fit at the
distributor and at the spark plugs. Replace wires as needed.
10. ENGINE TIMING CHECK AND DISTRIBUTOR CHECK*$
Adjust timing to underhood label specifications. Inspect the inside and
outside of the distributor cap and rotor for cracks, carbon tracking and
corrosion. Clean or replace as needed.
11. FUEL TANK, CAP AND LINES INSPECTION*$
-Inspect the
fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Remove fuel cap, inspect
gasket foran even filler neck imprint, and any damage. Replace parts
as needed.
12. ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION*
- Inspect
belt. Look for cracks, fraying, wear, and proper tension. Adjust or
replace as needed.
*An Emission Control Service
$=The CaliforniaAir Resources Board has determined that the failure to
perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or
limit recall liability prior to the completion of vehicle useful life. General
Motors, however, urges that allrecommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.
7-8
13. TIRE AND WHEEL ROTATION AND INSPECTION- For
proper wear and maximum tire life, rotate tires at the first 6,000 miles
(10 000 kilometers) for Schedule I or 7,500 miles (12 500 kilometers)
for Schedule I1 and then every 15,000 miles (25 000 kilometers)
thereafter. Follow the instructions and patterns shown in Section 6.
Check tires for uneven wear or damage. If irregular or premature wear
is apparent, check wheel alignment. Also, check for damaged wheels.
See “Tires” in the Index for more information.
14. DRIVE AXLE SERVICE- Check readfront axle fluid level and add
as needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals forleaking.
Locking Differential - Drain fluid at first oil change and refill.
Check fluid level and add as needed at subsequent oil changes. In
dusty areas or trailer towing applications, drain fluid at every
15,000 miles (24 135 kilometers) and refill.?
Standard Differential - Check fluid level and add as needed at
every oil change. In dusty areas or trailer towing applications,
drain fluid every 15,000 miles (24 135 kilometers) and refill.?
More frequent lubrication may be required for off-road use.
15. BRAKE SYSTEM INSPECTION- When the engine oil is changed,
inspect the lines and hoses for proper hookup, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Check the parking brake adjustment, and the fluid level in
the master cylinder. A low fluid level can indicate worn disc brake pads
which may need to be serviced.?
When the wheels are removed for rotation, inspect disc brake pads for
wear and rotors for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel
cylinders, parking brake, etc. at the same time.
Inspect brakes more often if driving habits or conditions result
frequent braking.
.L
fluid loss in these systems may indicate a problem. Have them inspected
and repaired at once.
tA
7-9
Owner Checks and Services
Listed below are owner checks and services which would bemade at the
time period specified to help ensure proper safety, emission performance,
and dependability of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids
or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones,
as shown in this section.
At Least Oncea Month
Tire Inflation Pressure Check- Check the tires for proper inflation. If
they are low, inflate them to the level specified on the Certification label.
See “Inflation-Tire Pressure” in the Index.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinder Lubrication- Lubricate key lock cylinders with one
of the lubricants recommended in this section.
Transmission Neutral or Clutch Start Switch Operation
-
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the manual parking brake, and the regular brake.See
“Brakes” and “Parking Brake” inthe Index. Do not use theaccelerator
pedal.
3. Be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
4. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear.
The starter should work only in “P” (Park) or “N” (Neutral).
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever in “ N ’ (Neutral),
push the clutch down halfway, and try tostart the engine. The starter
should work only when theclutch is pushed down all the way to the
floor.
7-10
Steering Column Lock Operation
- While parked, try to turn the key to
LOCK in each gear shift position.
0
With an automatic transmission, the key should turn to LOCK only
when the gear shift is in “ P ’ (Park).
0
With manual shift, the key should turn to LOCK only when you’re in
“R” (Reverse).
On vehicles with a key release lever, try to turn the key to LOCK without
pressing the lever. The key should turn to LOCK only with the key lever
depressed.
On all vehicles, the key should come outonly in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Transmission“ P ’ (Park) Mechanism Operation-
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
foot on the regular brake, set the manual parking brake.
0
:eping your
To check the parking brake: With the engine running and the
transmission in “ N ’ (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
To check the “P” (Park) mechanism’s holding ability: Apply the regular
brake and shift to “P” (Park). Release the manual parking brake, then
slowly release the regular brake.
Lap and Shoulder Belts Condition and Operation
- Inspect belt system,
including: webbing, buckles, latch plates, retractors, guide loops and
anchors. Have a belt assembly replaced if the webbing has beencut or
otherwise damaged.
Body Lubrication Service- Lubricate all body door hinges including the
endgate, endgate handle pivot points, and endgate mounted spare tire carrier
(if equipped), lubricate the body hood, fuel door and rear compartment
hinges, latches and locks including interior glove box and console doors,
and any moving seat hardware. Lubricate the hood safety lever pivot and
prop rod pivot. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to
a corrosive environment.
7-11
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Listed below are inspections and services which should be performedat
least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your
GM dealer’s service department or other qualified service center do these
jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Steering and Suspension Inspection?
- Inspect front and rearsuspension
and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or
lack of lubrication. Inspect power steering lines and hoses forproper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. (On vehicles equipped with
manual steering gear, check for seal leakage). Lubricate the steering linkage.
Accelerator Control System- Lubricate all pivot points withengine oil,
except the TBI throttle shaft. Do not lubricate the cam pulley. Remove all
external deposits from pulley. Do not oil anyaccelerator or cruise control
cables. Replace any cables that have high effortor excessive wear.
Exhaust System Inspection- Inspect the complete system. Inspect the
body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or
out-of-position parts, as well as open seams, holes, loose connections or
other conditions which could cause a heat buildup in thefloor pan or could
let exhaust fumes seep into the passenger compartments. See “Engine
Exhaust” in the Index.
Drive Axle Service- Check readfront axle fluid level and add as needed.
Check constant velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Transfer Case (four-wheel drive) Inspection? - Every 12 months or at
oil change intervals, check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant
when necessary. Check vent hose at transfer case forkinks and proper
installation. More frequent lubrication may be requiredon off-road use.
?A fluid loss in these systems may indicate a problem. Have them inspected
and repaired atonce.
7- 12
Recommended Fluids & Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or
specification may be obtained from your GM Dealer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
FLUIDLUBRICANT
API service SH or SG Energy
Conserving I1 oils of the proper
viscosity. The “SH” or “SG’
designation may be shown alone or
in combination with others, such as
“SH/CD”, or “SH, SG, CD,” or
“SG/CD”, etc. To determine the
preferred viscosity oil for your
vehicle’s engine (e.g. SAE 5W-30),
see “Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant
Mixture of water and a good quality
ethylene glycol base antifreeze or
an approved recycled coolant
conforming to GM Spectification
GM-6038-M (GM Part
No. 1052103).
Hydraulic Clutch System
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part
No. 12345347 or equivalent).
Delco Supreme 1 1 brake fluid
(GM Part No. 1052535 or DOT-3).
Hydraulic Brake Systems
Parking Brake Cable
Power Steering System
Manual Steering Gear
Automatic Transmission
5-Speed Manual Transmission
(RPO MY2)
@
Chassis lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
Catagory LiIl or GC-LB or
(GM Part No. 1052497).
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part
No. 1052884) or equivalent.
GM Lubricant (GM Part
No. 1052182) or equivalent.
DEXRON @-I11 (preferred) or
DEXRON @-IIE Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. 12345349).
7- 13
USAGE
Differential:
a. Standard - Front and Rear Axle
b. Locking
Transfer Case
FLUIDLUBRICANT
a. SAE-SOW-90 GL-5 gear
lubricant (GM Part No. 1052271).
b. SAE-80W-90 gear lubricant or
(GM Part No. 1052271).
DEXRON@-IIE Automatic
Transmission Fluid (GM Part
No. 1051855).
Column Shift, Transfer Case Shift
Lever, Propeller Shaft Slip Splines
and Universal Joints.
Chassis lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
Catagory LB or GC-LB (GM Part
No. 1052497).
Clutch Linkage. Pushrod to clutch
fork joint.
Chassis lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
Catagory LB or GC-LB (GM Part
No. 1052497).
Hood Latch Assembly:
a. Pivots and spring anchor
b. Release Pawl
Front Wheel Bearings
Constant Velocity Universal Joint
a. Engine oil (GM Part
No. 1050109).
b. Chassis lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
Catagory LB (GM Part
No. 1052497) or GC-LB or
equivalent.
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
Catagory GC or GC-LB (GM Part
No. 105 1344).
Chassis lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI Grade 2,
Catagory LB or GC-LB (GM Part
No. 1052497).
Engine Oil (GM Part No. 1050109).
Automatic Transmission Shift
Linkage, Floor Shift Linkage, Hood
and Door Hinges, Body Door Hinge
Pins, Endgate hinge and Linkage,
Folding Seat, Fuel Door Hinge
Key Lock Cylinders
GM Multi-Purpose lubricant
(GM Part No. 12345120) or a
synthetic light weight engine oil
(SAE 5W-30).
7-14
USAGE
Chassis Lubrication
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Chassis lubricant meeting
requirements of NLG Grade 2,
Catagory LB or GC-LB (GM Part
No. 1052497).
Windshield Washer Solvent
GM Optikleen@washer solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515) or
equivalent.
Weatherstrips
Dielectric silicone grease (GM Part
No. 12345579) or equivalent.
Endgate Mounted Spare Tire
Carrier (If Equipped), Outer
Endgate Handle Pivot Points, and
Hinges
Multi-purpose lubricant meeting
requirements of GM Part
No. 12345120.
Gas Line
Gas Line De-Icer (GM Part
No. 1051516).
7- 15
Maintenance Record
After each of the preceding Scheduled Maintenance Services is performed,
record the date, odometer reading,services performed (list item numbers)
and who performed the services in the appropriate column.In addition,
retain copies of your receipts. It is suggested that receipts be kept with your
Owner’s Manual.
7-16
Service Station Checks
It is important foryou or a servicestation attendant to perform these
under-hood checks at each fuel fill.
Check the engine oil level and add if necessary.
Check the engine coolant level and add if necessary.
Check the windshield washer fluid level and add if necessary.
See the Indexunder these itemsfor information on how to check them.
7-17
Battery
The Delco
Freedom battery
needs no water.
See Page 6-31.
Hood Release
Lever
See Page 6-6.
Remote
Oil Fte
lir\
See Page 6-13.
,Cooling
System
Check and add
coolant only at
the coolant
recovery tank.
See Page 6-23.
Power Steering
Reservoir
See Page 6-26.
-
\
Windshield
Washer Fluid
See Page 6-28.
Engine Oil
See Page 6-8.
\
Transmission
Fluid
Automatic:
See Page 6-15.
Manual:
See Page 6-18.
/
Brake Fluid
reservoir
See Page 6-29.
/
Clutch Fluid Reservoir
See Page 6-20.
/ Z a c i t y 20 U.S.
Gal. (76.0L. Use
only, 87 Octane
or higher.
See Page 6-3.
Spare Tire
Pressure
Located on left
rear wall, endgat
3r floor.
See Page 6-42.
\
Cold Tire
Pressure
See tire-loading
sticker on the
inside of the
rear edge of
the driver'sdoor
lock pillar.
See Page 6-39.
7-18
..
Customer Assistance Information
B
Section
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This
section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report
any safety defects .
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired (TDD) . . . . . 8-3
GM Participation in BBB AUTO LINE .
Alternative Dispute Resolution
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3
Reporting Safety Defects To The United States Government . . . . . . . . . 8 4
Reporting Safety Defects To The Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Reporting Safety Defects To General Motors
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
Cusfomer Satisfacfion Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and Chevrolet.
Normally, any concern with the sales transactionor the operation of your
vehicle. will be resolved by your dealer’s Sales or Service Departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned,
misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolvedto your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE - Discuss your concern witha member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns can often be quickly resolved at that
level.
If the matter has already been reviewed with the
Sales, Service, or Parts
Manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the General Manager.
STEP TWO - If after contacting a member of dealership management, it
appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Assistance
Center in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
In Mexico, call (525) 254-3777. In Puerto Rico or U.S. Virgin Islands, call
1-809-763-13 15. In allother overseas locations, contact GM North
American Export Sales in Canada by calling 1-416-644-4 112. As of
October 4, 1993, call 1-905-644-41 12.
For prompt assistance, please have the following information availableto
give the Customer Assistance Representative:
0
Your name, address, home and business telephone number
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle
registration or title, or the plate at the left top of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
0
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you to call the tollfree number listed previously in orderto
give your inquiry prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Chevrolet, write to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P. 0. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information bookletfor
addresses of Canadian andGM overseas offices.
8-2
When contacting Chevrolet, pleaseremember that your concern will likely
be resolvedin the dealership, using the dealership’s facilities, equipment
and personnel. That is why we suggest you follow Step Onefirst if you have
a concern.
Customer Assistance for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired(TDD)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, Chevrolet has installed
special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its
Customer AssistanceCenter. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or aconventional teletypewriter (TTY)can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-TDD-CHEV
(1-800-833-2438). (TDD users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
GM Participation inBBB AUTO LINE Alternative Dispute Resolution Program
*
*This program may not be available in all states, depending on state law.
Canadian owners refer to your Warranty andOwner Assistance information
booklet. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations
and/or to discontinue its participation in this program.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealerare committed to making sure
you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. Our experience has
shown if a situation arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, that the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure described
earlier in this section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third-party can assist in arriving
at a solution to a disagreement regarding vehiclerepairs or interpretation of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements Chevroletvoluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better
Business Bureau system to settle disputesbetween customers and
automobile manufacturers. Thisprogram is available free of charge to
customers who currently own or lease a GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure,
you may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number, or write
them at the following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better BusinessBureaus
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA
Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100 22203
8-3
To file a claim, you will be askedto provide your name and address, your
vehicle identification number (VIN), and a statement of the nature of your
complaint. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, andother
factors.
We prefer you utilize thecustomer satisfaction procedure before you resort
to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will
attempt to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary between you
and Chevrolet. If this mediation is unsuccessful,an informal hearing will be
scheduled where eligible customers may present theircase to an impartial
third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may accept or reject. If you
accept the decision, GM will be bound by that decision.The entire dispute
resolution procedure should ordinarily takeabout forty days from the time
you file a claim until a decision is made.
Some state laws may require you to use this program beforefiling a claim
with a state-run arbitration program or in the courts. For further
information, contact the BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Chevrolet
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-222- 1020.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could causea crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, andif
it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the
Hotline.
8-4
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSTO THE
CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,
you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying
General Motors of Canada Limited.You may write to:
Transport Canada, Box 8880
Ottawa, OntarioK l G 3J2
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020 ,
or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P. 0. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, pleasecall us at 1-800-263-3777
(French). Or, write:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Center
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioL 1 H 8P7
8-5
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer satisfaction,
Chevrolet is excited to provide the services of the Chevrolet/Geo Roadside
Assistance Center.
24-Hour Roadside AssistanceNumber
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, by calling
1-800-CHEV USA (1-800-243-8872). This toll-free number will provide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems.
If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone, our advisors have access
to a nationwide network of dealer recommended service providers. The
following services are available:
Towing
Locksmith
Tire repair
Rental car or taxi
Additional services as necessary
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that will provide you with
quality and priority service.When roadside services are required, our
advisors will explain any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the following available to
give to the advisor:
Vehicle Identification Number
License plate number
Vehicle color
0
Vehiclelocation
Telephone number where you can be reached
0
Vehiclemileage
Description of problem
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Roadside Assistance
program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the U.S.A. Please refer to
the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call 1-800-268-6800 for
emergency services.
8-6
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet/Geo offers Courtesy Transportation for customers needing
warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in
conjunction with the coverage provided by the BUMPER TO
BUMPER New Vehicle Limited Warranty to retail purchasers of 1994
Chevrolet/Geo passenger car and light duty trucks.
In Canada, please consult your GM Dealer for information on
courtesy transportation.
COURTESY TRANSPORTATIONINCLUDES:
One way SHUTTLE RIDE for any warranty repair.
Up to $30 maximum daily VEHICLE RENTAL allowance for any
overnight warranty repair up to 5 days.
Up to $30 maximum daily CAB, BUS, or OTHER transportation
allowance in lieu of rental for any overnight warranty repair up to 5
days.
Up to $10 daily FUEL allowance for rides provided by another person
(i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.) in lieu of rental for any overnight warranty
repair up to 5 days.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered
by your Chevrolet/Geo dealership service management. Claim amounts
should reflect all actual costs.
Chevrolet/Geo Courtesy Transportation Program is not part of the
BUMPER TO BUMPER New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet/Geo reserves the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Courtesy Transportation Program at any time without notification.
For additional program details, contact your ChevroletlGeo dealer.
Service Publications
Information on how to obtain Product Service Publications (PSP’s) and
Indexes as described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states (and
the District of Columbia) and only for cars and light trucks withGVWR less
than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg).
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins and Indexes
can be obtained by writing to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Service Publications Department
1908 Colonel Sam Dr.
Oshawa, Ontario L 1H 8P7
Chevrolet regularly sends its dealers useful service bulletins about
Chevrolet products. Chevrolet monitors product performance in the field.
We then prepare bulletins for servicing our products better. Now, you can
get these bulletins too.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the proper use andcare of
your vehicle. Some describe costly repairs. Othersdescribe inexpensive
repairs which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoidfuture costly
repairs. Some bulletins tell a technician howto repair a newor unexpected
condition. Others describe a quicker way to fix your vehicle. They canhelp
a technician service your vehicle better.
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small number ofcars or
trucks. Your Chevrolet dealer or a qualified technician may haveto
determine if a specific bulletinapplies to your vehicle.
You can subscribe to all Chevrolet’s bulletins by calling Helm, Inc. at
1-800-782-4356. This way you’ll get them as they become available.
Individual PSP’s
If you don’t want to buy all the PSP’s issued byChevrolet for all car or
as those
truck models in the model year, you can buy individual PSP’s, such
which may pertain to a particular model. To do this, you will first need to
see our index of PSP’s. It provides a varietyof information. Here’s what
you’ll find in the index and howyou can get one:
What You’ll Find in the Index:
A list of PSP’s publishedby Chevrolet in a model year(1990 or later).
PSP’s covering all models of Chevrolet carsor light trucks (less than
10,000 pounds (4 536 kg) GVWR) are listed in thesame index.
Ordering information so you can buy the specific PSP’s you may want.
0
Price information for the PSP’s you may want to buy.
How You Can Get an Index:
Indexes are published periodically. Most of thePSP’s which could
potentially apply to the most recentChevrolet models will be listed in the
most recent publication for that model year.This means you may wantto
wait until the end of the model year before ordering anindex, if you are
interested in buying PSP’s pertainingto a current model year car or truck.
Some PSP’s pertaining to a particular model year
vehicle may be published
in later years, and these wouldbe listed in the later year’s index. Whenyou
order an index for a model year that isnot over yet, we’ll sendyou the most
recently published issue. Check the ordering form for indexes for earlier
model years.
Cut outthe ordering form, fill it out, and mail it in. We will then see to it
that an index is mailed to you. There is no charge for indexes for the
1989- 1994 model years.
8-8
Toli-Free Telephone Number
If you want an additional ordering form foran index, just call toll-free and
we’ll be happy to send you one. Automated recording equipment will take
your name and mailing address. Thenumber to call is 1-800-5514123.
Copies at Participating Dealers
Copies of Indexes and individual PSP’s are at your participating Chevrolet
dealer. You can ask to see them.
A VERY IMPORTANT REMINDER: These PSP’s are meant for
technicians. They are not meant for the“do-it-yourselfer.” Technicians
have the equipment,tools, safety instructions, and know-how to do a job
quickly and safely.
Chevrolet reserves theright to change theseprocedures without notice.
Chevrolet Service Publications
You can get theseProduct Service Publicationsby using the order form.You
can also get ServiceManuals and Owner Publications.
8-9
B
n
Index
A
Accessory Power Outlet ...........................................
2-56
6-14
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
346-35
3 4
FanLever ....................................................
3 4
FunctionLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refrigerant Capacity ...........................................
6-69
TemperatureLever .............................................
3-4
Antenna. Fixed Mast .............................................
3-24
Anti-lock Brakes (See “Brakes”)
6-49
Appearancecare ................................................
MaterialsChart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-57
8-3
Arbitration Program ...............................................
3-6
Audiosystems ...................................................
3-7
AMRadio ....................................................
AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc (CD) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
AM-FM Stereo Audio System ...................................
3-10
AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck and Equalizer. . . . . . . . 3-15
3-22
Anti-Theft Feature (CD) System) .................................
3-18
Cassette Tape Player Care .......................................
3-24
CompactDiscCare ............................................
AutomaticTransmission ..........................................
2-20
6-15
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle
6-22
Front .......................................................
6-20
Rear ........................................................
RearLocking .................................................
2-25
Battery ...............................
.......
. . . . . . . . 6-31
Belts (See “Safety Belts”)
Better Business Bureau Mediation ....................................
8-3
4-34
Blizzard .......................................................
Brakes
Anti-lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
6.269.3.0
Fluid ..................................................
Four-wheel Anti-lock ..........................................
4-7
Leakcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-31
Mastercylinder ..............................................
6-29
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
Replacingparts ...............................................
6-30
System Warning Light ....................................
2.68. 4-16
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-37
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
InEmergencies ................................................
4-7
Break-In,NewVehicle
...........................................
2-15
BulbReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
Replacementchart ............................................
6-63
1
C
Capacities and Specification Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-62
CarbonMonoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2.29.2.30.
4-4
Cassette Tape Player (see “Audio Systems” )
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-38
6-39
Certificatioflire Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Child Restraints (See “Safety Belts”)
Cigarette LightedAshtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Circuit Breakers (See “Fuses”)
Cleaning
6-54
Finishcare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
InsideofVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
Instrument Panel, Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
OutsideofVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52
Special Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52
VinylorLeather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
Clock
3-9
AMRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM-FM Stereo Audio Compact Disc (CD) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-11
AM-FM Stereo Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
AM-FM Stereo Audio System with Cassette Deck and Equalizer . . . . . . . . 3-17
3-2
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ConvenienceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Coolant (See “Engine”)
6-63
Cooling System Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63
Crankcase Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-44
2-46
Increasespeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-48
OnHills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-47
247
Reducespeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
246
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-45
ToGetOutOf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-48
Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech Impaired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5 1.
DomeLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2-51
2-74
2-52
2-5
2-6
Driving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
AcrossanIncline
4-24
After Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-41
BackingUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19
Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
4-30
HighwayHypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-34
InBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-27
InCity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Mud. Sand. Snow. Or Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22. 5-32
4-25
InRain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InWater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-11
LossofControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
4-13
Off-Roading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Hill and Mountain Roads
....................................
4-30
4-16
OnOff-Road Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OnSnoworIce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4-10
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Skidding ....................................................
4-12
4-32.5-32
Stuck in Deep Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Throughwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-19.4-23
4-17
Uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-32
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-37
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Electrical System
Accessory Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
6-60
Add-on Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Endgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-8
Electric Glass Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
2-10
Mounted Spare Tire Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine
5-1 3. 6-24
Adding Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
Coolant (Block) Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 3.5, 6-13
6-23.6-63
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-70
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
5-18
FanNoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-62
Oil (See “Oil”)
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11
RunningWhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
2-17
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment, Add-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41
Exhaustsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-38
3
FanNoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Filter Replacement Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-68
Finish
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
6-29
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-62
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
CoolantRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulicclutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
6-31
Leakcheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18
ManualTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
Powersteering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20
RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-13
RecommendedFluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28
FogLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Four-WheelDrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31,6-21
2-3 1,2-33, 6-21
Transfer Case ......................................
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
6-5
FillingYourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
ForeignCountries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
6-4
Gasolines for Cleaner Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tankcapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60,6-66
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
6-61
FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-61,6-63
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.........................
6-61
Power Windows and Other Power Options
6-61
Trailer WiringHarness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-61
WindshieldWipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FuelGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OilPressureGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
2-76
2-70
2-76
2-65
2-72
2-65
2-67
2-66
2-77
H
HalogenBulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32
5-2
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HeadRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
6-32
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
High-LowBeam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-40. 4-35
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
Heating System (without A/C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
FanLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
FunctionLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-5
RearWindowDefogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-39
Hood
Checking Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
LatchesandHinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-37
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
If You're Stuck in Sand. Mud. Ice. or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation-Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32
2-15
6-42
Jackstorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumpstarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20
5-3
K
KeyReleaseLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-17
KeylessEntry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Matching Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Labels
Certification/Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-50
Bulb Keplacetnent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
2-73
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Gages Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-73
Domes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
FogLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-50
5
Lights (continued)
6-33
Front Parkingnurn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights (See “Headlights”)
2-74,2..75
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7 1 6-38
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-40
Overhead Console Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-53
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7 1, 6-38
6-34
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63
Replacementchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39
4-13.6-39
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Accelerator Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
6-37
Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EndgateHandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-37
6-22
FrontAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Suspension and Steering Linkage ............................
6-35
6-35
Front Wheel Bearings (Two-Wheel Drive) .........................
HoodLatchesandHinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36
6-37
Lockcylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-37
Propeller Shaft Slip Splines/Universal Joints ........................
6-20
RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RecommendedLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-13
6-21
Transfercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-78
M
Maintenance
OtherItems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ScheduledMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WhenTowingaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder (See “Brakes”)
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convexoutside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ModelReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35
7-12
7-16
7-3
6-56
3-37
2-53
2-55
2-53
2-54
2-55...
111
0
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off-Road Driving (See “Driving”)
Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposalofused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PressureGage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ToCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
2-66
4-10
6-8
6-12
6-13
2-72
6-9
Oil (continued)
WhatKindtoUse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WhentoAdd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner Checks and Services ........................................
6-10
6-9
6-13
7-10
Parking
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-28
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) ............................
2-27
Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) ..............................
2-28
ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
Passing Other Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10. 41
6-40
Payloadcapacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...................................
7-12
Power
2-6
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SteeringFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
Winches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-44
Product Service Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7
Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio (see “Audio Systems”)
Rear Window Defogger . . . . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovery Hcroks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocking YourVehicle ............................................
6-25
SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraints ...............................................
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Small Children and Babies ......................................
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lapshoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Largechildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Properwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Questions & Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RearSeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ReminderLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing After a Crash ........................................
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why They Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
6-53
141
1-28
1-26
1-27
1-40
1-23
1-15
1-38
1-14
1-13
1-24
1-14
1-41
1-21
1-10
7
3-5
7-13
5-33
6-62
8-4
8-6
5-33
SafetyChains ...................................................
4-39
Safety Warnings and Symbols ........................................
vi
Scheduled Maintenance Services .....................................
7-3
Seats
Controls ......................................................
1-2
Easy Entry Seat ................................................
1-6
ManualFront ..................................................
1-2
Manual Lumbar Adjustment ......................................
1-3
PowerDriver’s ................................................
1-3
Power Lumbar Adjustment .......................................
1-3
RearFolding ..................................................
1-7
Reclining .....................................................
1-4
SeatbackLatches ...............................................
1-4
Service
Do-It-Yourself ................................................
6-2
Parts Identification Label .......................................
6-60
Publications ...............................................
8-7, 8-8
Replacement Parts and Filter Recommendations .....................
6-62
Service Engine Soon Light ........................................
2-71
Service Station Checks ............................................
7-17
Shift Indicator Light .........................................
2-24, 2-74
Shifting Into Park ................................................
2-26
Single Belt Accessory Drive ........................................
6-35
Sliding Rear Quarter Window ......................................
2-36
Spare Tire ......................................................
5-24
Endgate-Mounted Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
Removal ....................................................
5-24
Specificationcharts ..............................................
6-62
Speedometer ....................................................
2-65
Starting your Engine .............................................
2-17
Steering ........................................................
4-8
InEmergencies ................................................
4-9
Tips .........................................................
4-8
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-58
GarageDoorOpener ...........................................
2-61
Sunvisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-55
Tachometer .....................................................
2-67
Theft ..........................................................
2-14
Thermostat .....................................................
6-26
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-42
Balancing ...................................................
6-47
Chains ......................................................
6-49
Changing a Flat ..........................................
5.18,5.25
Flat ........................................................
5-18
Hub Caps and Wheel Nut Caps ..................................
5-26
Inspection andRotation ........................................
6-44
Loading .....................................................
6-39
New ........................................................
6-45
Pressure .....................................................
6-42
Spare (See “Spare Tire”)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ...................................
6-46
8
Towing
ATrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-37
4-41
Following Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-39
4-44
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational Vehicle ...........................................
4-35
4-37.5-7
Towing Your Vehicle .........................................
Trailer
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5. 4-40
Wiring Harness ..........................................
2-80.6-61
6-41
TraileringPackage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21
Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
Transmission
2-20
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-23
Five-SpeedManual ...........................................
6.16.5.18
Fluid ..................................................
Fluid. ToAdd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19
Four-wheel (See “Four-wheel Drive”)
2-24
Manual-Shiftspeeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) ............................
2-27
2-66
Tripodometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-38
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ....................................
V
Vehicle
Damage Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-58.6-59
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . .6-31
.
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
~ 1 1 ~111.
.
IX. X
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
AirVents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3-2
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-77
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W
Warning
Devices. Other ................................................
Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights, Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hub CapsNheel Nut Caps ......................................
NutTorque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding Rear Quarter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
5-3
5-2
2-67
6-47
6-55
5-26
6-63
647
6-48
2-35
2-36
Windshield Washer ..............................................
Rearwasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WasherFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wipers. Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bladechatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bladecleaning ...............................................
BladeInserts .................................................
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
2-42
243
6-28
4-32
2-41
6-54
6-54
6-36
243
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute
for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE